JP2022002619A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the interest for a game.SOLUTION: A first variation performance based on a winning entry of a game ball into a first start port, and a second variation performance based on a winning entry of a game ball into a second start port can be executed. An update performance in which predetermined information displayed is updated can be executed in an execution of the first variation performance. The update performance is executed less often in the case in which the first variation performance which results in a jackpot is executed in a specific game state than in the case in which the first variation performance which results in a jackpot is executed in a normal game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, and executes a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Is common.

In such a gaming machine, the interest of the game is enhanced by performing various effects in the variable effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-033816

However, in a gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the variation effect and the interest of the game is poor.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the first starting condition is satisfied (the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening). Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the special game is played. A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. A predetermined effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a second variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is displayed on the display means during execution of the first variation effect. It is possible to execute an update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) for updating information (numerical value, quantity), as compared with the case where the first variable effect, which is a special result, is executed during the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that it is more difficult to execute the update effect when the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a rear view which shows the state which each unit is assembled to the base frame body. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of FIG. It is a figure which shows the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board is housed. It is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case. It is a rear perspective view of the main board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main control board. It is a front view of the main board case when the main control board is housed. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the demo waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice type determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice type determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice effect scenario determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the lamp change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the timer effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the event timer number of times determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the suggestion event determination table for one time of a timer. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first suggested event determination table for two timers, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second suggested event determination table for two timers. It is a figure which shows an example of the update pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reach advance notice determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reach advance notice determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the development production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the roulette notice decision table. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop option determination table of a roulette notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in effect pattern determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the determination effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the operation part was operated while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in which the fluctuation production is started from the customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in which the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the player changes the effect element during the 1st variation effect in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the player changes the effect element during the 2nd variation effect in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the look-ahead operation effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead operation effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the line notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the line notice effect are executed. It is a timing chart when the timer effect is executed during the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which a timer effect is executed during a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the roulette notice and the pseudo continuous effect are executed before the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the pseudo continuous effect is executed after the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the development effect is executed and SP reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the development effect is executed and SPSP reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example in the case where the cut-in production is executed during the SP reach production and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 in the case where the decision effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect, and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production, and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 in the case where the decision effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect, and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the production example 2 in the case where the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production, and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the special SP reach effect is executed and becomes a big hit in the effect mode A (normal game state). It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the special SP reach effect is executed and becomes a big hit in the effect mode G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the production example when the probability change mission production is executed during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction. It is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front of the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction. It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be visually recognized via the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), a game ball paid out from a payout device 100 described later, and the like are used. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls of the above, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11, and the launch operation of the game balls. Is provided with a launch operation device 13 for performing the above.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. It is installed side by side on the left and right.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the 17 is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 emits effect by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is possible. Further, the driving force of the button drive motor, which is a part of the button drive device 17b, makes it possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the effect position located above. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is in the origin position. Further, the effect operation can be performed by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor which is a part of the button drive device 17b, and the effect is produced even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. The button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 9) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the lower plate 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a 15a (see FIG. 9) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing handles 15 for emitting light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the 4 to the closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 has a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the launching member 28, and an ascending member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. An inclined launch rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage portion 42 that rolls the game ball introduced inside the frame 40 and causes it to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and the general winning openings 43 are provided. When a winning (winning) game ball is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are added as prize balls from the payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When it is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win (win), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning (winning) game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are placed on the upper plate 11 as prize balls from the payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, the game ball is from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for winning a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 detects a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) in which the game ball can win (winning) and a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball in the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 9) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning). (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

A winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from a panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LED or the like).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit judgment of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided, which converts the (basic aspect) into an open state (special aspect) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (Fig.). 9), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variablely) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are placed on the upper plate 11 as prize balls from the payout device 100. It will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second start port detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39 and flows down are provided. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. The gaming ball that has flowed down the out-ball flow path and is detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the gaming machine 1 from the ejection port on the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, a second special symbol hold display 64, as well as. The normal symbol hold display 65, the round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when the jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and the jackpot game (special game) or the time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and a status confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. A main information display device 59 including a device 68 (see FIG. 9) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is affixed in the vicinity of the main information display device 59 (not shown). On the winning probability display sticker, the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4-1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed. The position where the winning probability display sticker is attached is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol is for jackpot determination by acquiring a random value for jackpot determination (first special symbol determination information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing the random number value and the jackpot judgment value. When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is made, the first special symbol display 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot determination of the second special symbol is for jackpot determination by acquiring a random value for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing the random number value and the jackpot judgment value. When the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is made, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each jackpot determination.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means that the jackpot game (special game) is executed in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to do so. The "big hit game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game)" is in an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The winning lottery of a normal symbol is a "hit" by acquiring a hit determination random value when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 and comparing the acquired hit determination random value with the hit determination value. Corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variation display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot determination of the first special symbol (the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. In addition, although the first hold storage is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The jackpot determination of the second special symbol (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second hold storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold storage. The maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Public figure hold storage), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold storage. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved storages for the normal figure is four, the number may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot judgment of a special symbol is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it is turned off and "-" is displayed. It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 2 jackpot games, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-handed LED that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right-handed game area (so-called right-handed) during a jackpot state (special game state) and a time-saving game state. It is for displaying the hitting display, and the LED lights up during the big hit state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the mode shifts to, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. As described above, since the state confirmation indicator 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is provided. It is possible to easily check whether or not it is set to.

The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is possible to recognize which setting is set. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. However, when the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 is lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it can also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of any of the display devices of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right inside the game area 5a, a sub first fluctuation display 81, a sub second fluctuation display 82, a sub first hold display 83, a sub second hold display 84, and a sub normal figure fluctuation display 85. , A sub-information display device 80 including a sub-normal-figure holding display 86 and a sub-right-handed display 87 for urging a game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) is provided. The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display device such as the status confirmation display device 68 described above, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The sub first variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub second variation indicator 82 displays the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. It is for (notifying), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is variable display), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, a big hit. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 blink and stop during the fluctuation display of the special symbol so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed can be grasped. When it is displayed, it may be turned on or off.

The sub first hold display 83 is for displaying the number of first hold storages (hold number), and the sub second hold display 84 displays the number of second hold storages (hold number). This is for the purpose, and each is composed of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of holds is "4".

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number (hold number) of the normal figure hold storage, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A first movable member 73 imitating the above is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed, and an effect symbol executed during the change display of the special symbol. There is a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of 70a.

The display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area, and is displayed in each variable display area. By scrolling the effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. Further, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area can be used as a variable display of the special symbol. Correspondingly, by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed.

The effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are, for example, composed of symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and are executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed in correspondence with (synchronization) with the variation display of the symbol. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (oscillation display) before the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display). As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

The "temporary stop display" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not) to say the aspect.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular effect symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. be. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies, which will be described later, are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) depending on the result of the jackpot determination. By being displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), the player's expectation that the jackpot (special game) will be executed (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") will be increased. It has become.

Further, at the lower part of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first special figure hold, which is the current number of first hold storages in the normal game state (basically excluding the specific game state). The first hold icon display area 70B for displaying the first hold icon of the number corresponding to the number (U1), and the number of the current second hold storage in the specific game state (basically excluding the normal game state). The second hold icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2), and the special symbol (effect symbol) being executed in the normal game state and the specific game state. The icon display area 70C for displaying the (related) icon corresponding to the variable display of 70a) is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 First, the first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold storage is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 showing the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Then, every time the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal gaming state, the first hold icon displayed on each display unit is shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C. It has become.

In the first hold icon display area 70B configured in this way, since the first hold icon is displayed in the normal gaming state, the first hold icon is displayed in response to an increase or decrease in the first special figure hold number (U1). The number also increases or decreases (increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the first hold icon is performed), but since the first hold icon is not displayed in the specific game state, the number of first special figure hold (U1) increases or decreases. The number of the first hold icons does not increase or decrease correspondingly (the increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the first hold icon is not performed).

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special figure hold (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 Second, the second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Then, every time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the specific game state, the second hold icon displayed on each display unit is shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C. It has become.

In the second hold icon display area 70D configured in this way, the second hold icon is displayed in the specific gaming state, so that the second hold icon is displayed in response to an increase or decrease in the second special figure hold number (U2). The number also increases or decreases (the increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the second hold icon is performed), but since the second hold icon is not displayed in the normal gaming state, the number of the second special figure hold (U2) increases or decreases. The number of the second hold icons does not increase or decrease corresponding to (the increase display or shift display (decrease display) of the second hold icon is not performed).

If the second special figure hold number (U2) is "1" or more when the specific game state (here, the time-saving game state) ends and the normal game state is reached, the second special figure hold number (here). Since the second hold icon is exceptionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D until U2) becomes "0", the second is corresponding to the increase / decrease in the second special figure hold number (U2). The number of hold icons also increases or decreases (the second hold icon is increased or shifted (decreased)), but the second hold icon is not displayed without exception in the normal gaming state (second). The shift display of the hold icon may not be performed).

The icon display area 70C is set on the first display unit 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B in response to the start of variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the normal gaming state (excluding the specific gaming state). The first of the second hold icon display area 70D corresponding to the start of the variable display of the displayed first hold icon or the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the specific game state (excluding the normal game state). The icon TI is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the display unit 70D1, and the icon TI disappears (erases) at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). do. The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the present embodiment, the "first special figure hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special figure hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number". In addition, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

Further, on the left side of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), a first reserved number indicating the current number of first special figure reserved numbers (U1) in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state is displayed. 1st special figure holding number display area 70E for the purpose, and 2nd special figure holding for displaying the 2nd holding number indicating the current number of the 2nd special figure holding number (U2) in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. A number display area 70F is formed.

Therefore, the hold display indicating the number of 1st special figure hold is performed in the 1st hold icon display area 70B and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E in the normal gaming state, and the 1st special figure hold number in the specific gaming state. It will be done in the display area 70E. Further, the hold display indicating the second special figure hold number is performed in the second special figure hold number display area 70F in the normal game state, and the second hold icon display area 70D and the second special figure hold number in the specific game state. It will be done in the display area 70F.

The first movable member 73 can perform effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emitting mode. In the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the effect position located below due to the driving force of the first movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 9). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving to, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emitting mode. Between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the effect position located on the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 9). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving diagonally in the vertical direction, and the second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their production positions partially overlap with each other, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 basically operate at the same time. By not doing so, they do not collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, at the stage where one movable member moves to the effect position and then returns to a position that does not overlap with the effect position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the effect position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game supplied from a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, and the like. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) having a built-in main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect that controls the effect according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) outside the game machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting a game signal) is provided.

Further, an open / close door type cover member is provided which opens and closes in the left-right direction around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire effect control device 130A from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered with the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various types of lighting. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the device (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) is provided.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the advantage of the game (game). (Different advantages) RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, a signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key. The setting key switch 112a for inputting the above, the information display 113 for displaying the performance information and the set value that enable the actual performance of the game machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying set values and performance information (normal base value described later), and is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays having a decimal point DP side by side. There is. Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and the two seven-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits are configured. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of set values and performance information is configured.

(Structure on the back of the game board)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame body, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 3, a base frame body 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5, and the base frame body 170 is attached. An image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled on the back side (rear surface side) of the above so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main control device 110A (main control board) is attached to the lower back surface of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186. The main board case 200 containing the 110 is attached.

The base frame body 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the front surface 171 of the annular body is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5. On the back surface of the base frame 170, there is a space for arranging various circuit boards and parts.
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of the image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back side of the base frame body 170. The image display unit 180 is slidable from the side (horizontal direction), vertical direction, or diagonal direction of the base frame with respect to the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the effect control board. It is configured to be attached to.
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame are covered with the lid member 190.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a included in the main control board 110 are exposed.
Further, the information display 113 included in the main control board 110 can be visually recognized via the transparent main board case 200.
The staff of the game store opens the door of the game machine, and while visually recognizing the information display 113 on the back of the game machine, operates the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a to clear the RWM, change the setting, and confirm the setting. , You can perform operations such as checking the performance information of the gaming machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and the operation member 685 that can be operated by the staff of the amusement shop or the like from the opening provided at the position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a in the main board case 200. Is protruding.
When the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the pressed operation member 685. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end surface of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with the keyhole is exposed from the opening provided in the main board case 200.
Amusement shop staff and the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a.

(Main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6.
In the present embodiment, the game board 5 side will be described as the front side and the direction opposite to the game board 5 as the rear side with respect to the main board case 200. Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when the main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 5.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main board case according to an example of the present embodiment, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view including a pedestal of the main board case 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded view of the main board case 200. It is a rear perspective view of the time.
The main board case 200 of the present embodiment is assembled to the back surface of a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine via a pedestal 280 in a state where the main control board 110 on which electronic components are mounted is housed inside.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the game machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 186) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
Since the main board case 200 accommodating the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of a game board such as a pachinko gaming machine via a pedestal 280, it is above the back side of the game board. The electronic components mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the case piece 220.

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than the two sides along the up-down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that engage with each shaft portion 281. The pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of the upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

When the main board case 200 is attached to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back side. Then, since the hook portion 249 is in a state where it can be engaged with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200 is brought close to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.

Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the free end side of the main board case 200 is rotated upward around the shaft portion 281 to superimpose the main board case 200 on the pedestal 280. At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is hooked on the recess D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 282 and the main board case 200.

After that, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200 including the hook portion 249. In this way, the main control device 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

The main board case 200 is two transparent resin case pieces (lower case pieces) that are housed inside with a single-sided mounting type main control board 110 (printed circuit board) in which electronic components are arranged on only one side. 210, upper case piece 220), a cutting member 230 for cutting the open prohibition seal held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and the main opening prohibition seal 250 described later. It includes a cap 240 that is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the substrate case 200.

The main board case 200 includes the main control board 110 in a state where a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on the main control board 110 are exposed. The main substrate case 200 is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main board case main body (sealing body 300).
At the lower part of the upper case piece 220, a protective cover 229 that covers the connection portion between the internal connector and the external connector provided on the internal main control board 110 is arranged.
In the present embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a caulking member with the main control board 110 interposed therebetween.

A caulking fastening portion 291 using a caulking member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main board case 200, and a caulking member (locking member) is provided in a caulking fastening hole (sealing portion) provided in the caulking fastening portion 291. ) Is driven in (locked) to lock the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the caulking fastening hole, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 can be opened and closed and detached.

In the caulking fastening portion 291 of the main board case 200 of the present embodiment, two caulking fastening holes are provided (caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B).
The caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B are configured by communicating the lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and the upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220.

It should be noted that only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 at one time. After removing the caulking member (breaking) and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), if the caulking member is to be fastened again, the caulking member is driven into the remaining caulking fastening hole to fasten the fastening. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an inclusion portion 581 for containing the main control board 110. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the main control unit 110 m side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is opposite to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include a control board storage portion 211 and 221 for storing the main control board 110, and a sealing portion 212 and 222 for forming a sealing base portion 310 described later, respectively. There is. The control board storage portions 211 and 221 are projected from the plate portions 211a and 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and the peripheral edges of the plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and are provided on one side of the plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.

Further, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 110 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210. The cylindrical portion 565 is formed with a hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 110, a hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of the screw for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the main control board 110 via the hole portion 567. A screw thread provided on the shaft portion of the screw is combined with the screw thread formed in the hole portion 567 of the cylindrical portion 565. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

Of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211, a portion (hereinafter referred to as "male portion") protruding from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a is formed in an L shape. Three hook pieces 211c are formed. On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221, the portion protruding from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as "female portion") has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which a male portion of the control board accommodating portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Further, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 are slid to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 6 along the left-right direction. Then, since the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion engages with the hooking piece 221d, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. Is done.

When combined in this way, the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 form a box-shaped encapsulation portion 581 internally shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the inclusion section 581, the possibility that the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, and the like are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The main control board 110 is attached to the inside of the control board storage unit 221 before the control board storage units 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC or the like mounted on the main control board 110 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board storage portion 221. This is because the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, electronic components such as the main control unit 110m mounted on the main control board 110 This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside through the plate portion 221a whether or not the plastic is illegally replaced. In the present embodiment, when the main control device 110A provided with the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, it is mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 from the back side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220. Electronic components can be visually recognized.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right ends of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stop piece 91 and a second screw stop piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222. When the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the encapsulation base portion 310 is formed by the encapsulation portions 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of the encapsulation body 300 in which these are combined. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base portion 310, in addition to the first screw stop piece 91 and the second screw stop piece 92, the cap 240 is attached to the end portion in the longitudinal direction of the sealing body 300. , The third screw stop piece 393 provided in the cap 240 overlaps with each other to form a screw stop portion 390 for screwing.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 project to the right from the right end portion of the control board storage portions 211 and 221. The sealing portions 212 and 222 have the same height along the left-right direction and the same width in the vertical direction. Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in each of the sealing portions 212 and 222 along the left-right direction. Two groove portions 222a parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing portion 222 so as to be separated from each other for a predetermined period of time, and one groove portion 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 along the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing portions 212 and 222 form a sealing base portion 310 on the right portion of the combined control board storage portions 211 and 221. In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel at regular intervals, and an insertion / removal space is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other.

The open prohibition sticker 250 is used as a means for sealing the main board case 200, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having certification qualification. The open prohibition seal 250 is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of an easily cut material such as paper in consideration of cutability, and a plurality of cuts are formed. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the opening prohibition sticker 250. In addition, the characters "opening prohibited" are also printed on the opening prohibition sticker 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of picking portions 361, and a cutting portion 364. The foundation portion 230a, which is the basis of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the foundation portion 230a. The cut portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed in a blade shape. The picking portions 361 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the foundation portion 230a, and are formed in a shape bent in a "<" shape as a whole. The left end portion of the picking portion 361 is referred to as a free end portion 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can cover the entire sealing base portion 310 so as to cover the sealing base portion 310, and is formed to be removable from the sealing base portion 310. The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310, and a third screw stop piece 393 formed on one end side of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end portion 361a of the pinching portion 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion / removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. It is provided. Further, a groove portion 386 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion / extraction space of the sealing base portion 310. After that, the opening prohibition sticker 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a part of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion / removal space 310a. Further, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end portion 361a of the grip portion 361 of the cutting member 230.

When the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the third screw stop piece 393 is a combination of the first screw stop piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw stop piece 92 of the upper case piece 220. It overlaps with and constitutes a screw fixing portion 390 for screwing. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fastening portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When the main board case 200 is unsealed, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310. The same applies when the seal of the main board case 200 is illegally released. The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the opening prohibition seal 250 is irreparably scratched by the cut portion 364 or the like.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
The main control board 110 that controls the game includes a main control unit 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, and a plurality of electronic components 595 (ICs, resistors, connectors, etc.) different from the main control unit 110m. Capacitors, coils, etc.), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc. are mounted.

The main control unit 110m stores the stored contents used for controlling the game. Further, the main control unit 110m stores stored contents that affect the result of the game.
Further, the main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer in which a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later, are integrated.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right in the lower part of the main control board 110. The plurality of connectors 771 to 767 are arranged inside the six openings 779 provided at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Of the plurality of connectors 771 to 767, two connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are among the first start port detection switch 45a, the second start port detection switch 47a, the general winning port detection switch 43a, and the large winning port detection switch 50a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize. A signal from at least a part is input. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a first start port detection switch 45a for detecting that a game ball has won, a second start port detection switch 47a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, and a large winning opening detection. It is assumed that all the signals of the switch 50a are input. The detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent colors, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773 and 776 are different colors from the fluorescent colors.

The main control unit 110m has a plate-shaped main body portion extending in the left-right direction and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end portion of the main body portion and electrically connected to the main control board 110. I have. The signal pin (first signal pin) is visually mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 via the main board case 200.
The plurality of electronic components 595 include signal pins (second signal pins) provided in each of the plurality of electronic components. The signal pin (second signal pin) is visually mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 via the main board case 200.

The RWM clear switch 111a will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688, and the recess 688 is provided with an opening 687.
Further, as can be seen from FIG. 5, the operation member 685 is provided at the corresponding position of the RWM clear switch 111a, and when the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the pressed operation member 685. Will be done. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.
A cover member 686 is provided in the recess 688. The cover member 686 is a shaft support that can rotate and move between a first position in the recess 688 that closes the operating member 685 to make it inoperable and a second position that opens the operating member 685 to enable operation. Has been done.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, the substrate case 200 need only be provided with an opening 687 having a size capable of inserting the operating member 685. Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200.
The end of the RWM clear switch 111a may be exposed from the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated by using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end surface of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110.
The end surface of the setting key switch 112a provided with the keyhole is exposed from the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, but is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200.
The staff or the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a.

(Identification display)
The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 110, the main control unit 110 m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display including information about the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524, and the identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is identified. It is called display 525.

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed by silk printing on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 110. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the main control unit 110 m by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
The identification display 523, 524, 525 attached to the main board case 200 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

The identification labels 521 to 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification label 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string of "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string of "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 in the identification display 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to a manufacturer name, a model name, or the like. In the present embodiment, as an example, among "ABCD", "AB" represents a manufacturer name and "CD" represents a model name.

In the identification display 521 to 525, the manufacturer name itself may be displayed instead of displaying the manufacturer name by "AB" included in "ABCD". Further, the model name itself may be displayed instead of being displayed as "CD" included in "ABCD". Further, the model of the gaming machine may be displayed on the identification display 521 to 525.

(Seal member)
The seal member will be described. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, the seal member 1560 and the seal member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The seal member 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220, and the seal member 1561 is a position display portion 561 provided at the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220. It is pasted on.
The seal members 1560 and 1561 are both made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
The seal members 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), respectively. In FIG. 5, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 located on the front side of the seal members 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

The seal member 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, the seal member main body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal in which the seal member main body 1560A is watermarked.
The "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types such as those using a hologram and those that look different depending on the physical shape can be applied. ..
However, the seal member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to predetermined processing (watermark processing), has at least high translucency, and ensures a certain level of visibility.

The seal member 1560 has a white background entry area 1570 (entry field), a code section 1572, and an information display section 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "main board control number" on the seal member main body 1560A. I have.
The entry area 1570, the code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the character display described later attached to these areas are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is not exposed. It is a department.
The seal member 1560 includes a plurality of non-transmissive portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through these non-transmissive portions.
The code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 as the non-transmissive unit are provided at positions on the main control unit 110 m and the seal member main body 1560A that does not overlap with the information display 113.

On the other hand, the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed and translucent in the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the areas other than the character display described later, which are attached to these areas, in the seal member main body 1560A. Is a high translucent portion 1574.
The translucent portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion that can be confirmed by looking through the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 110 can be visually recognized via the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control board 110. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 110 via the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal member 1560 affixes the seal member 1562 attached to the main control unit 110 m on the main control board 110 to a position visible from all angles. Has been done.
Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal member 1560, including the entry area 1570, the cord portion 1572, and the information display unit 1573, the entire seal member 1560 overlaps with the main control unit 110 m from all angles. It is provided so that it does not become a position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main control unit 110m can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control unit 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal member 1560 is positioned so that the entire seal member 1560, including the entry area 1570, the cord portion 1572, and the information display unit 1573, does not overlap with the information display 113 from all angles. It is provided so as to be.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200.

Although it cannot be said that the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other in FIG. 8, the seal member 1560 does not overlap with the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, and the information display 113 does not overlap. The seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other if all the conditions that the seal member 1561 does not overlap with the information display 113 are satisfied. You may.

The display contents of the seal member 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The entry area 1570 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate.

Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, the word "opener" is printed in black above the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector's name is entered in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date when the main board case 200 is opened is entered in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was fraudulent.

The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal member 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information mobile terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Etc. are included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 110 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 110. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) included in the seal member 1560 will be described.
The translucent part 1574 is an entry area 1570, a code part 1572, an information display part 1573, a notation of "main board control number", a frame, an opener, a notation of the opening date, circles 1 to circles in the sealing member main body 1560A. It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction existing between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display unit 1573 arranged side by side and the two upper entry areas 1570.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the vertical direction between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62 (a)) via the translucent portion 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The seal member 1561 will be described.
The seal member 1561 is attached to the seal member 1561 attached to the main control unit 110 m on the main control board 110 at a position visible from all angles.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as to be positioned so as not to overlap the main control unit 110 m from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main control unit 110m can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap with the information display 113 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200.

Further, the seal member 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
For example, at least one of a model name, a manufacturer name, a rated voltage, and a total capacity is printed as specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion where such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" including a model, a manufacturer name "AA", a rated voltage and a total capacity (AC24V ± 5%, 250VA).
In addition, the part where the model name is displayed is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow for the transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white on the background.

Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal member 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".
The seal member 1562 may display a QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification display 1596.
Further, the seal member 1561 and the seal member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification labels 1595 and 1596. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA" in the identification labels 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.
Although the identification indicators 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the main control unit 110 m, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 110 may be displayed including the same identification display as the identification display 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal members 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been fraudulent. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the area 1575 is provided in the seal member 1560, the inspector can see the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 is opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). Can be filled in. Further, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date and the like on which it is confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 has been fraudulent. Further, since the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the seal member 1560 is provided with the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion), the inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 through the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion). Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the cord unit 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control unit 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control unit 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the code unit 1572 is associated with the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 by using the code unit 1572. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 110 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110 m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the fraud in which the main control unit 110m is replaced by checking the seal member 1562. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

It should be noted that various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the main control unit 110 m can be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, particularly the upper case piece 220, does not have a vent.
In the main board case 200, date marks are formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220.
The date mark is a mark for lot management that is added at the time of manufacturing (molding) a case that is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of this embodiment, a component having a height that makes the seal member 1562 invisible is provided in the vicinity of the main control unit 110 m.

As described above, the main control board 110 is mounted with a main control unit 110m for controlling the game, an information display 113 for displaying the performance of the game machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. There is. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110. As a result, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized via the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200. Further, the main control unit 110m and the information display 113 can be directly visually recognized via the main board case 200.

By watermarking the transparent portion of the seal member 1560 having a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions that need to be attached to the main substrate case 200, duplication of the seal member 1560 can be prevented. Further, by attaching the seal member 1560 to a position that does not cover the main control unit 110 m and the information display 113, the main control is an important board component without being affected by watermarking and multiple non-transparent parts. The visibility of the information display 113, which needs to be read accurately, can be reliably ensured in the unit 110 m.

For electronic components 595, which are less important than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, check the status through watermarking from the gaps between multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts 1574 (peeping part). Can be done. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board parts can be ensured by the transparent parts. Further, in the non-transparent unit, predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as specifying the main control unit 110m can be displayed. Different information can be displayed or entered in each of the plurality of non-transparent parts.

The information display 113 may be arranged not on the upper end side of the main control board 110 but on the lower end side. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are arranged on the (opposite) upper end side opposite to the information display 113.
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are arranged at the (contradictory) ends opposite to the information display 113.
Further, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of the end portion. Even in that case, be sure to arrange it at a position where it does not overlap with the cable, harness, seal member 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RWM clear switch 111a may be provided on the payout control board 120. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the setting key switch 112a is electrically connected to the main control board 110, it can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 110.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main RAM 110c as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, an effect control board 130, and the like. Is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and games notified to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the game information output terminal board via the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and also controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and causes the payout device 100. It controls and sends a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

An open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like are connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121. The payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a controls the predetermined number of play balls. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of paying out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the launch of the game ball in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed by the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal display), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control unit 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, and receives the effect from the main control board 110. In response to the input signals from the command and effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, control is performed to cause various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects (data and commands). Is output).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the effect key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) to display a predetermined image. Or, control is performed so that the voice output device 9 outputs a predetermined voice.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. For receiving voice control commands from the image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, and the control control unit 141. Based on this, it includes a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) that controls the voice output device 9, and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes a centralized CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 (VDP) and a voice control unit 148 (voice). It has an input / output port to which the LSI) is connected.

The integrated CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process and an audio output device for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142a), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). And, it has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. Drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second. It is output to the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (displaying an image) is performed 60 times per second.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and is the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, and receives the lamp from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices to perform a predetermined effect (outputs data and commands).

A frame lighting device 10, a button drive device 17b, a panel lighting device 76, and a sub information display device 80 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control unit, and are transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various effect data (including commands) generated, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 is performed, and the button drive device 17b and the button drive device 17b are used. It controls the drive of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control). It is supplied to the substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot determination of the special symbol has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state", and the states relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47 are a "non-time saving state" and a "non-time saving state". It has a "time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low probability non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is "low probability state" and "non-time saving state"
(2) Low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) that is both "low probability state" and "time saving state"
(3) High-probability time-saving game state (probability variation game state) that is both "high probability state" and "time-saving state"

The gaming state when the gaming is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state". In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45 or the first when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is "1". 2 In the jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters the starting port 47, the winning probability of the jackpot is set as low as about 1/300. On the other hand, in the "high probability state", the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability state, and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is set as high as about 1/60. Say the game status.

Specifically, there are four types of set values, "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is about 1/300, which is a high probability. The jackpot winning probability in the state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is about 1/295, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state is about. When it becomes 1/59 and the set value is "3", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is about 1/290, the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state is about 1/58, and the set value is ". In the case of "4", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state occurs after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "probability change jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving state" means the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. It is a gaming state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is easily set is short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is ". It refers to a gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving state". Further, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127/128. Is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously advance the game in a state in which it is difficult to consume the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". Has been done. However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of ordinary symbols may be, for example, 0/128.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the set value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, and any value such as 3 times or 8 times may be set as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the big hit determination, the small hit that is less advantageous to the advantager than the big hit is not won, but for example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/100. May be good. In this case, it is preferable that the small hit probabilities are the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous to the player (higher jackpot probability). You may do it.

Further, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be the same in all the set values (1 to 4), for example, two or three set values (1 and). In 2, 1 to 3 etc.), the probabilities of being judged as big hits in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be the same. Further, the set value of the present embodiment is 4 steps of 1 to 4, but the setting value is not limited to 4 steps, and may be more or less than 4 steps.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 10B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (big hit, loss). It is attached, and for reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big hit" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10B, and refers to the current set value, the probability state, and the jackpot. Based on the judgment random value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10A, when the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal gaming state, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" The judgment random value is determined to be a "big hit". Then, the random value for jackpot determination other than the jackpot determination is determined to be "missing".

The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored. The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the jackpot determination is performed, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area or the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , The jackpot determination will be made using the shifted special figure determination information.

Further, the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is reserved. The icon is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the reservation icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is displayed. The second hold icon is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11A is a special symbol determination table for jackpots for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 11B is a special symbol determination table when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11B, the special symbol determination table corresponds to the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result. The stop special figure data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated with each other.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols for executing the first jackpot game, and the special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols for executing the second jackpot game. , The special symbol "03" is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 6 times. In the round game, even before the opening time elapses, one round game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50. Further, after the end of the first big hit game, the low probability non-time saving game state (time saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second big hit game", a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Further, after the end of the second big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

In the "third big hit game", a round game in which the second big winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to four times. Further, after the end of the third big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

Although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. May be good.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11A to 11B, and the type of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the type of the special symbol is based on the random value for determining the special symbol. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of the jackpot special symbol and the type of the lost special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without complicating the game.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various lost symbols do not change depending on the set value and are constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 12A is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 12B is a variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination are used. The random number value, the first special figure holding number (U1) or the second special figure holding number (U2), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, the special figure fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. And the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, and refers to a jackpot determination result, a special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), a reach determination random number value, a first special figure hold number (U1), or a first. 2 The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved special figures (U2) and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. It has become like.

Further, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "ultra-shortening variation", and "long variation" are three effect symbols 70a that fluctuate at high speed. , It is a production that stops without reaching.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means the production to make. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left side region and the right side region. , The mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach production.

Further, the "SP reach" and the "special SP reach" are super reach productions in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach production, and the development production is executed from the normal reach production, and then executed. For example, the two effect symbols 70a are reduced from the normal size and moved to the upper part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (the effect symbol 70a forming the reach state is smaller than the normal size). We), a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, "special SP reach" is performed with a special effect than "SP reach".

Further, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP" 7 "reach" are special reach productions in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of super reach, and are executed after the normal reach production or the super reach production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are reduced to the minimum size and moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70 (the effect symbol 70a forming the reach state). However, a pattern change effect smaller than the normal size is performed), and a special reach effect than "SP reach" is performed by using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In "SPSP reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP" 7 "reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and is executed after the normal reach production. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed in a state of being aligned, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. And "SPSP" 7 "reach", a special reach production (reach production with a big hit confirmed) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning a big hit related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed).

When the shortened variation or the ultra-shortened variation is executed, the effect symbol 70a starts the variable display according to the first start display mode in which the three effect symbols 70a start the variable display (scroll) at the same time, and the three effects are displayed. The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped by the first stop display mode in which the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the same time, and other variable effects (normal variation, long variation, normal reach, SP reach, special SP reach, SPSP reach, SPSP). When "7" reach and full rotation reach are executed, the effect symbol 70a changes the display according to the second start display mode in which the three effect symbols 70a start the variable display (scroll) in the order of left → right → middle. The effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped by the second stop display mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the order of left → right → middle.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the types of the special figure variation patterns to be determined are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that when the number of reserved first special figures increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, shortened variation is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, the shortened fluctuation is not determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting left than when hitting right in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that even if the number of reserved first special figures increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is (super) shortened. While the fluctuation is not determined, if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the (long) shortened fluctuation can be easily determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variation display of the special symbol when hitting right than when hitting left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

The fifth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is the time saving state as compared with the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed during the non-time saving state. It is easier to execute the variation display (variation effect) with the same variation pattern (of the variation pattern to be executed) when the loss variation display (the first variation effect that becomes the loss) of the first special symbol is executed. (There are few types). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the non-time saving state in which the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is the time saving state as compared with the case where the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect which is a jackpot) is executed during the non-time saving state. When the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect that becomes a jackpot) is executed, the variation display (variation effect) with the same variation pattern is more likely to be executed (the execution variation pattern). (There are few types). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the non-time saving state in which the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed during the time reduction state. It is easier to execute the variation display (variation effect) with the same variation pattern (type of variation pattern to be executed) when the loss variation display (first variation effect that becomes loss) of the first special symbol is executed. There are few) points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the time-saving state in which the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that during the time saving state, the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect that becomes the jackpot) is executed, rather than during the time saving state. When the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect that becomes a jackpot) is executed, it is easier to execute the variation display (variation effect) with the same variation pattern (type of variation pattern to be executed). There are few) points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the time-saving state in which the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed during the time reduction state. In addition, there are more types of fluctuation patterns to be executed when the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect which is a loss) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the time-saving state in which the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is the hold of the first special figure when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the second variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed during the non-time saving state. The difference between the average fluctuation time at the maximum number (here, "3") and the average fluctuation time at a predetermined number (for example, "1") smaller than the maximum number is more than the difference between the first special symbol during the time saving state. Average fluctuation time at the maximum number of 1st special figure hold (here, "3") when executing the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation effect that causes loss) and a predetermined number less than the maximum number (for example, "1") The difference from the average fluctuation time in ()) is smaller (strictly speaking, when the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the difference is in the average fluctuation time due to the number of reserved first special symbols. There is no) point. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is the number of reserved second special figures when the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect that becomes a loss) is executed during the time saving state. Is more than the difference between the average fluctuation time at the maximum number (here, "3") and the average fluctuation time at a predetermined number (for example, "1") less than the maximum number, the loss of the first special symbol during the time saving state. The average fluctuation time at the maximum number of 1st special figure reservations (here, "3") and the predetermined number less than the maximum number (for example, "1") when the fluctuation display (the first fluctuation effect that becomes a loss) is executed. ) Is smaller than the average fluctuation time (strictly speaking, when the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, there is no difference in the average fluctuation time due to the number of reserved first special symbols. ) Points can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect during the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when executing the loss variation display (the first variation effect that becomes a loss) of the first special symbol in the time saving state, a difference may be provided in the average fluctuation time depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. Specifically, when the first special figure hold number is "0" or "1", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is executed, and when the fluctuation time is "2" or "3", the fluctuation time is 10. It is advisable to perform normal fluctuations in seconds. Even in this case, the number of held 1st special symbols when the loss fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is executed during the non-time saving state is based on the average fluctuation time and the maximum number at the maximum number (here, "3"). The maximum number of 1st special symbol reservations (here, here) when the loss variation display of the 1st special symbol is executed during the time saving state, rather than the difference from the average fluctuation time with a small predetermined number (for example, "1"). It is preferable that the difference between the average fluctuation time in "3") and the average fluctuation time in a predetermined number (for example, "1") smaller than the maximum number is smaller.

In addition, when the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation effect that becomes a jackpot) is executed regardless of whether the time is shortened or the time is shortened, the average fluctuation time according to the number of reserved first special symbols is executed. You may make a difference in. Even in this case, the average fluctuation time at the maximum number (here, "3") of the first special figure hold number in the non-time saving state and the predetermined number less than the maximum number (for example, "1") The number of first special figure holdings in the time saving state is the maximum number (here, the average fluctuation time at "3" and the predetermined number less than the maximum number (for example, "1") than the difference from the average fluctuation time. The difference from the average time should be smaller.

The twelfth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that when the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect that becomes a jackpot) is executed during the time saving state, the first is during the non-time saving state. 1 It is executed by the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the maximum fluctuation time which is executed when the jackpot fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed or when the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state. There are points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the non-time saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is easily executed and in the time saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easy to be executed. Can be improved.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 13A is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. 13 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the pre-judgment table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are displayed. , The special map schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special map schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 13, and is based on a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure variation pattern. The pattern is determined, and the look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S2, and performs start-up waiting processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S7 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step S8 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S8 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S9 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, every time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is set. When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as the setting value is confirmed, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and a process for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are predetermined while the setting is being changed. It is fully lit with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area and the checksum calculated in step S7 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area for games), the process is transferred to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area for games is abnormal), the process is started. Assuming that the control state before the power is cut off cannot be restored normally, the process is transferred to step S12.

When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is performed in step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the control of the game is not performed (the game cannot be controlled), and the error cannot be cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

It should be noted that the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but it may be canceled even when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and the unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Setting change" is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Please go. " It is to output an unrecoverable error sound (“Unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been cut off.
The audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a “directing device”.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S13 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S14 as if the RWM clear operation is executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state), and the payout control board 120 and It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on on the image display devices 70 and 71. ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the sound output device 9 to the RWM area is displayed. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that it has been initialized for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S16 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting confirmation specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation in which the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, and the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated. Performs processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command performs a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed. Specifically, a screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and a predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are being confirmed. All lights are turned on by color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 will perform processing for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 are notified of the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration. The design "135") can be displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 can be fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the sound output device 9 can be displayed. It is to output a power restoration notification sound (“power restoration” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power recovery notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a inputs other commands (a first special figure hold number (U1), a special figure hold number designation command indicating a second special figure hold number (U2), and a normal figure hold number (G). A command for specifying the number of reserved numbers to be shown) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure hold and the number of normal figure hold, and the process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 can be performed. It will be done.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the set value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S25, the jackpot determination is performed. Initial value random value update processing is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs processing for clearing the output port in step S28, and in step S29, sets the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c. The checksum (abnormality determination data) of (excluding) is calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, the backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, the backup flag is saved. Performs a process to prohibit RAM access and waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so fraudulent activities can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine is improved. It is possible to make it.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation, which is a nuisance to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 10 and the lighting device 76 for the panel, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Further, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (it is the first power-on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. Then, the process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. , The process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game status, but after the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent, the current game status is sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting change end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the setting change is performed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the setting change is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the opening time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be set The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a determines the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination, as in step S30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, an out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a is used to determine the number of special figure reservations (big hit determination, etc.), control the display of special symbols, control the opening / closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), control the gaming state, and the like. Perform control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal drawing control process for performing a normal figure storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), a display control of a normal symbol, an opening / closing control of a second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal map and electric control process, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, it controls to perform the magnetic anomaly error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator Performs data creation processing for creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a has port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Display output processing to output signals such as special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of normal medium payouts, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, and during the normal gaming state. Performs processing for counting the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the game state. ..

The total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. The second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return time process. Specifically, a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the number of payouts and outs is counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, and the gaming machine is used. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. Update and update (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening, and whether or not the game is currently a big hit game (special game). Is determined. If you are currently playing a big hit, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that won the big winning opening 50 and update (C ← C + 1) to get the big winning opening. The detection switch input process ends.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (wins) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (specify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 17, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal figure hold storage, which is the number of normal figure hold storage stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of holdings of the normal figure is less than 4, "1" is added to the number of holdings of the normal figure to update it, and the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol determination, normal figure fluctuation pattern) is updated. (Random value for determination) is acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal figure judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (the game ball wins the first start port 45). When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value) are acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special feature. The first special figure hold number designation command corresponding to the figure hold number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the command for designating the number of reserved first special figures is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved first special figures.

The main CPU 110a stores the special symbol determination information acquired in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit is searched. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the non-time saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving game state, the process is transferred to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving game state, the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for effect, and this time, the first 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 is executed before or before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that executes a predetermined advance notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. The look-ahead notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. Is done using.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first start port 45, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), The first special figure hold number designation command, the first pre-determination process, and the first look-ahead designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second start port 47, the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold storage, respectively. It may be read as the second special figure hold number (U2), the second special figure hold number designation command, the second pre-determination process, and the second look-ahead designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric control process is completed.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the change display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the hold storage (special figure judgment information), the change time is set, and the start command (special). Performs processing for transmitting the symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) to the effect control board 130, processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and the like. The special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for this purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the change display of the special symbol is stopped according to the passage of the change time, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special figure stop command) is produced and controlled. A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing a process for transmitting to the board 130, a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and the like is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is lost due to the passage of the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol, and the big hit special symbol is a big hit. The opening time of the game is set, and the processing for transmitting the opening designation command to the effect control board 130 and the special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started according to the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game, and the process for transmitting the round number designation command to the effect control board 130 and the big hit based on the end of the final round game. Execution of jackpot game processing (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting the ending designation command to the effect control board 130, processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", and the like. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing for ending the jackpot game with the passage of the ending time and the gaming state after the jackpot end (low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state, high probability number of times, time saving number of times) ), The special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0", and the big hit game end processing (step S350) is executed.

It should be noted that the number of executions of the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game state is counted (whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or a probabilistic game state). If the change display of the special symbol, which is the predetermined number of times (for example, 800 times) is stopped and displayed, is not in the probabilistic game state, the change display of the special symbol is executed 600 times. The first special time saving state (time saving game state) may be generated over the period (up to). In this first special time saving state, various tables (big hit judgment table, special symbol judgment table, special symbol variation pattern judgment table, advance judgment table, etc.) that are the same as the normal time saving game state are used, but from the normal time saving game state. May also be disadvantageous to the player, for example, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is lower than in the normal time-saving game state (127/128) (for example, higher probability than in the non-time-saving state). It may be set to 100/128 or 1/128, which is the same probability as the non-time saving state), and the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be the same as the normal time saving gaming state.

In addition, as a result of the jackpot judgment, a special loss different from the normal loss is provided, and when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol won in the special loss, it is not in the probabilistic game state. , The second special time saving state (time saving game state) may be generated over a predetermined number of times (for example, until the variation display of the special symbol is executed 50 times). In this second special time saving state, various tables (big hit judgment table, special symbol judgment table, special symbol variation pattern judgment table, advance judgment table, etc.) that are the same as the normal time saving game state are used, but from the normal time saving game state. May also be disadvantageous to the player, for example, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is lower than in the normal time-saving game state (127/128) (for example, higher probability than in the non-time-saving state). It may be set to 100/128 or 1/128, which is the same probability as the non-time saving state), and the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be the same as the normal time saving gaming state.

In addition, if a special loss is won and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed during the normal time saving game state, the normal time saving game state and the second special time saving state may be generated in an overlapping manner. In this case, it is preferable to maintain the performance of the normal time-saving game state (probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbol, etc.).

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving state overlap each other, the performance of the normal time-saving game state (probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbol, etc.) ) Is maintained, and if the normal time-saving game state ends first and becomes the second special time-saving state, the performance of the normal time-saving game state (probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, (average) fluctuation of the normal symbol) It is better to take over the time etc.).

Further, when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed during the first special time reduction state, the first special time reduction state and the second special time reduction state may be generated in an overlapping manner. However, the first special time saving state may be maintained so that the second special time saving state is not generated.

In addition, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery in the non-time saving state and various time saving states (normal time saving game state, first special time saving state, second special time saving state) is the same (for example, 120/128), and the winning probability is the same (for example, 120/128). Also, the (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbol in various time-saving states may be shortened.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
A special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process is moved to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S310-4. To move.

The main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the second special figure reservation number (U2) in step S310-3, and corresponds to the subtracted second special figure hold number (U2) in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the second special figure determination information hold storage area. The data stored in the storage unit is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been played is deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S319-1. To move.

The main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the first special figure reservation number (U1) in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the subtracted first special figure reservation number (U1). The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-8. The shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure judgment information used in the previous game is deleted.

In addition, along with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the first special figure hold number (U1) and the second special figure hold number (U2) after subtraction is displayed in the main RAM 110c. Set in the specified area of. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reserved storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is the second). Although it was decided to subtract the number of special figures on hold in order of priority, the first special figure determination information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area was set in the order in which the game balls entered the starting port. It may be shifted (the number of reserved first special figures and the number of reserved second special figures are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. (The number of reserved first special figures may be deducted in preference to the number of reserved second special figures).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Judge whether or not. Further, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 and stopped. Performs the process of determining the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is obtained. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output by the output control process of the step S800. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will display the variation of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. The customer waiting state means a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is used for producing the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demo effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and in step E40, performs a sub random number update process. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit)
A timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change / confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change designation command or the setting confirmation designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if the setting change designation command is received, the above-mentioned setting is made. The process for executing the change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, the process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output sound. The power-on sound is output from the device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing a power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power recovery notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display the power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output sound. A power recovery sound is output from the device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a customer waiting state specification command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and performing a customer waiting demo effect after a predetermined time has elapsed if the command has been received is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), or by sound. A customer waiting demo sound is output from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special figure hold number specification command or a normal figure hold number specification command is received by referring to the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, it is stored (understood) in the sub RAM 130c. ) Performs processing to update the number of 1st special figure hold, 2nd special figure hold number, normal figure hold number, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead system effect processing in step E500. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a look-ahead specification command or a special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is being received, and if so, the icon is changed as a look-ahead system effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous notice production, and lamp change production. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

The "icon change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the hold icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect" and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

The "continuous notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes a player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
The "ramp change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs the special drawing special electric effect effect processing. Specifically, the special symbol specification command, the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the special figure stop specification command, the jackpot opening specification command, the round number specification command, and the jackpot ending specification command are referred to with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if it is received, the process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu Fuden effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to receive a normal symbol specification command, a normal figure fluctuation pattern specification command, a normal figure stop specification command, a hit opening specification command, a hit ending specification command, and the like. It is determined whether or not it is present, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E800. Specifically, an effect mode (effect stage) in which effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, BGM, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. Regarding, the update conditions (change in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery at the start of the variable effect, and the start of the variable effect after the SP / SPSP reach effect that results in a loss are executed) according to the progress of the game. It is determined whether or not the effect mode is satisfied, and when the update condition is satisfied, a process for updating the effect mode to any of a plurality of effect modes is performed.

The "effect mode" includes the effect modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving game state) and the effect modes D to E set in the probability variation game state (high probability time saving game state). The effect modes F to G set in the gaming state (low accuracy time saving game state: including the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state described above) are provided. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, confirming the setting, etc.), the effect mode initially set is always the effect mode A, and the power supply is used. The effect mode that is set first when controlled to the probabilistic gaming state when it is ON is always the effect mode D, and the effect mode that is set first when it is controlled to the time-saving gaming state when the power is turned on. Is always in the production mode F.

Further, in the effect modes A to C, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number (identification character) + a character corresponding to the number (decorative part) + a number and a design effect image (decorative part) for decorating the background of the character. The numbers and character designs are different between the production modes. In the effect modes D to F, the effect symbol 70a is composed of only numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common between the effect modes. Further, in the effect modes A to F, the background image corresponding to each effect mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating operation).

Further, regardless of the effect mode, the effect symbol 70a can be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation) and then scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) at the start of the variable effect. In ~ C (normal game state), when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is started from the state where the number of reserved first special symbols is "1" or "2", before scroll display. While the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is performed, the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is started from the state where the first special symbol hold number is "3" or "4". In this case, the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed before the scroll display, and in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the number of first special figure reservations is "1" to "4". When the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is started, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed (preparatory operation) before the scroll display. That is, the ratio of the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is executed depending on whether the first variation effect is executed during the normal gaming state or the first variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state. Is different. Therefore, it is possible to change the effect mode at the start of the first variable effect according to the game state (effect mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed from the state where the first special figure hold number is "1" to "4". , When the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is performed before the scroll display, and the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed from the state where the second special symbol hold number is "1". Is a reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a before the scroll display, while the second special symbol hold number is changed from "2" to "4" to the second variation effect (change of the second special symbol). When the display) is executed, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed before the scroll display. That is, the ratio of the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is executed depending on whether the first variation effect is executed during the specific game state or the second variation effect is executed during the specific game state. Is different. Therefore, it is possible to change the effect mode at the start of the first variable effect according to the game state (effect mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The preparatory operation before scrolling of the effect symbol 70a may be enlarged and displayed, or may be a floating display that rises upward from the stop position. Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is started in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the preparation operation of the effect symbol 70a is not performed before the scroll display. You may.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a performs the preparatory operation at the start of the variable effect, the three effect symbols 70a start the scroll display in the order of left, middle, and right, and when the preparatory operation is not performed, the three effect symbols 70a start the scroll display. The effect symbol 70a may start the scroll display at the same time.

Further, regarding the update condition of the effect mode, the first special symbol during the specific game state is more than the case where the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during the normal game state. It is more difficult to win the mode update lottery when the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of is executed (the first variation effect), and it is more difficult to execute the SP / SPSP reach effect where the result is lost. However, in the latter case, it is more difficult to satisfy the update condition of the production mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol during the specific game state is more than the case where the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during the specific game state. When (second variable effect) is executed, it is easier to win the mode update lottery, and it is easier to execute the SP / SPSP reach effect, which results in a loss. Therefore, the latter is the effect mode rather than the former. The update condition is easy to be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the display mode of the first hold icon is the same in the effect modes A to C, by changing the display mode of the first hold icon for each effect mode, three types of display modes are displayed in the normal gaming state. The first hold icon may be displayed by. Further, although the display mode of the second hold icon is the same in the effect modes D to G, the display mode of the second hold icon is different between the effect modes D to E and the effect modes F to G. The second hold icon may be displayed according to two types of display modes in the gaming state.

Further, the effect mode (background image, display mode of effect pattern, BGM, etc.) is updated according to the progress of the game, but it depends on the operation of the effect button 17 during the waiting for customers or the variable effect. The player may be able to change the effect mode (background image, display mode of effect pattern, BGM, etc.). Further, when the effect mode is changed during the variable effect, the effect mode may be changed at the time when the change operation is performed, or the effect is produced when the running variable effect is completed. The mode may be changed, or the effect mode may be changed when the next variable effect starts.

For example, in the normal gaming state, if the effect mode is changed during the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect), the next execution is the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect). Even in the case of variable effect), the effect mode (background image, display mode of effect pattern, BGM, etc.) is changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the effect mode is changed during the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect), the next execution is the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect). Even if it is a variable effect), change the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player for changing the effect mode (effect element used for the variable effect), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the specific game state, when the effect mode is changed during the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect), the next execution is the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect). Even in the case of variable effect), the effect mode (background image, display mode of effect pattern, BGM, etc.) is changed. Further, in the specific game state, when the effect mode is changed during the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect), the next execution is the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect). Even if it is a variable effect), change the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player for changing the effect mode (effect element used for the variable effect), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Performs processing for executing, and processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Customer waiting production processing of the production control unit)
A customer waiting effect process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state specification command has not been received, the process is transferred to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state specification command has been received, in step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demo production. Select the demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 23) for determining the waiting time of. The details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23, one demo waiting time is determined from a plurality of demo waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo is waiting. Specifically, it is determined whether the demo standby timer is set. If the demo is not waiting, the customer waiting effect processing is terminated as if the customer waiting demo effect is not executed. If the demo is waiting, the demo wait timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. ..

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E300-6 whether or not the demo standby timer = 0. If the demo wait timer is not 0, the customer wait effect process is terminated assuming that the customer wait demo effect is not executed yet, and if the demo wait timer = 0, the customer wait demo effect is produced in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the customer waiting effect processing this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting demo effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect that appeals to the player to execute the game is executed.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo effect.

In FIG. 23, the demo waiting time determination table is associated with the game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time. Four types of demo waiting times of 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times of 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state. Is set.

The first feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demo waiting time after the display is still displayed, the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed), and the effect pattern after the customer waiting demo effect is completed. There is a difference from the demo waiting time after is displayed still. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the current state, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (variation) rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the production symbol is still displayed after the passage of time is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the power is restored rather than the demo standby time after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the effect symbol is statically displayed. Immediately after that, the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the effect is displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the symbol is displayed still is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo effect is completed is the shortest. Therefore, the appealing power to the game to the player can be effectively enhanced, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that each demo waiting time in a specific gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability short-time gaming state) is more than each demo waiting time in the normal gaming state. The longer point is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading effect processing of the effect control unit)
A look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead system effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, an effect mode of the icon change effect, and the like. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, an effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and the like. The details of the continuous advance notice effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect execution process for executing the continuous advance notice effect determined to be executed in the continuous advance notice effect determination process. The details of the continuous advance notice effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (turning on the winning opening lamp NR so that the light emitting mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and this time. End the look-ahead effect processing. The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E510-1 whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E510-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received look-ahead designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, it is in the normal gaming state, and the received look-ahead designation command is based on the winning of the second starting port 47. In some cases, a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state) may be provided.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-5. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining the final display mode of the icon. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, and is plurality based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from the icon final display modes of.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (white icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E510-8 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 24) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 24, a plurality of icons are based on the final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Determine one change scenario from the change scenarios of.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. Set the display command in the transmission buffer and end the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , A predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined effect sound (first winning sound) may be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. The type of notification sound when an icon is generated for each type is described.

The final display mode of the icon includes a white icon as a normal icon, a blue icon as a special icon that expects a jackpot game to be executed (suggests that a jackpot game may be executed), and a red icon. , And a rainbow icon is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit related to the special icon is higher in the order of (white icon <) blue icon <red icon <rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms that it will be a big hit.

Then, when the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generation notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generation notification sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the first generation notification sound is output. , When the third generation notification sound is output and the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generation notification sound is set to be output.

When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state, any of the first to fourth generation notification sounds is obtained according to the display mode at the start of displaying the first hold icon based on the winning. However, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 in the normal game state, none of the first to fourth generation notification sounds is output.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 in the specific gaming state, any of the second to fourth generation notification sounds is obtained according to the display mode at the start of displaying the second hold icon based on the winning. Is output (in the case of a white icon, the first generation notification sound is not output), but if the game ball wins in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, the first to first 4 None of the generated notification sounds is output.

Here, the first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach where the scheduled fluctuation pattern is not reach. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the player's expectation can be increased depending on the display mode of the hold icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, the first start opening during the normal gaming state is more than the case where the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 during the specific gaming state. It is pointed out that the generation notification sound is more likely to be output when the game ball wins in 45. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the game in the normal game state in which the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the first starting port 45 than in the specific game state in which the player strikes right, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a third feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, the second start opening during the specific gaming state is more than the case where the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 during the specific gaming state. It is pointed out that the generation notification sound is more likely to be output when the game ball wins in 47. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the game in a specific game state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize at the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected. ..

Although different notification sounds were set for each of the multiple icon display modes (4 types), the notification sound generated when the white icon was generated changed to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. There may be two types of time change notification sound, or the notification sound may not be output when the white icon is generated, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to any mode. Further, for the rainbow icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to make three types.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the generated notification sound is not output when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, but the generated notification sound is output at a lower rate than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45. It may be output, and instead of not outputting the generation notification sound when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, it is better than the case where the game ball wins in the second start port 47. The generation notification sound may be output at a low rate.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach effect) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide which scenario to let. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a is on hold to change (update) the display mode in the current variation effect. Determine if there is an icon. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-4, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 29) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 29, among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon may change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) may be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process is moved to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-9, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 30) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon shown in FIG. 30, based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from a plurality of the icon change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing. The display mode of the icon is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the hold icon, which is referred to when determining the change pattern for the hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the selected hold icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of fluctuation) according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears, and the icon is displayed. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the action effect that acts on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. Is performed to change the display mode of the hold icon, and the symbol action change pattern 01 is set.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect pattern is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from white icon to blue icon, change from blue icon to red icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the next higher display mode, and jackpot winning expectation Is set to 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) to change the display mode to a level two levels higher.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 30 (a) shows a case where the display mode of the icon is changed by one step. It is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 30 (b) is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the selected icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1UP (for example, change from white icon to blue icon, change from blue icon to red icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the next higher display mode, and jackpot winning expectation Is set to 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) that changes the display mode to a level two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo variation is performed.

The "pseudo-continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern multiple times for the jackpot judgment based on the winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47). All within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) in order to make it appear as if This is a special aspect of the effect symbol variation display in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times. Further, a flame effect is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and the color of the flame effect changes in the order of blue → red each time the temporary stop and re-variation are repeated.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is limited to the above two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Continuous notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
A continuous notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-1 whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E530-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the feasible period of the continuous advance notice effect. If it is the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect (look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead chance eye effect), the process is moved to step E530-4 and the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. If it is not a period, the process is transferred to step E530-18 assuming that the continuous advance notice effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed.

In the "look-ahead operation effect", a special game is executed by executing an operation effect (notice effect) in which the second movable member 74 is operated in a predetermined mode at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or a plurality of variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation.

The "look-ahead effect effect" is an effect effect (preliminary effect) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the effect symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or more variation effects (during preparation operation, before scrolling). ) Is an effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed.

The "look-ahead vibration effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration effect (notice effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined mode at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests.

"Look-ahead zone effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing an effect in the zone (notice effect) that displays a zone image (zone background image) from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production that continuously suggests.

The "look-ahead chance eye effect" is an effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by stopping and displaying the effect symbols 70a in an array having a predetermined regularity in one or more variable effects. It has become.

The "executable period of the continuous advance notice effect" means that there is nothing to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is received. In some cases, it is in a normal gaming state, and when a look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize in the second starting port 47 is received, it is in a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous advance notice type determination table (see FIGS. 32 and 33) according to the current effect mode, and in step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a continuously refers to the continuous advance notice type determination table. The type of advance notice (whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the type of continuous advance notice effect to be executed) is determined. The details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a continuous advance notice type that executes the continuous advance notice effect. If the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-18, and if the continuous advance notice effect is executed, in step E530-7, the continuous advance notice scenario determination table according to the current effect mode (FIG. 34). , See FIG. 35). The details of the continuous notice scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-8 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead operation effect is determined. When the look-ahead operation effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-10, and when the look-ahead operation effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead operation effect is referred to in step E530-9 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead effect effect is determined. If the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead effect effect is referred to in step E530-11 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-12 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead vibration effect is determined. If the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-14, and if the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead vibration effect is referred to in step E530-13 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-14 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead zone effect is determined. If the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E530-16, and if the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead zone effect is referred to in step E530-15 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-16 whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead chance eye effect is determined. If the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and if the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the look-ahead chance is referred to in the continuous advance notice scenario determination table in step E530-17. The advance notice scenario of the eye effect is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the continuous advance notice effect determination process of this time is completed.

In step E530-18, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario (notice scenario indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed) of the continuous notice effect, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the continuous notice effect this time. End the decision process.

The advance notice scenario or non-notice scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous advance notice effect execution process of step E540 described above, and the process for executing the continuous advance notice effect or the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Processing will be performed to prevent it.

As described above, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead operation effect is not executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead operation effect is not executed. The second movable member 74 operates (operates) when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead effect effect (effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a) in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) in the normal gaming state. While the effect to be performed) can be executed, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) in the specific gaming state, so that the variation of the first special symbol is performed during the normal gaming state. The rate at which the look-ahead effect effect is executed differs depending on whether the display (first variation effect) is executed or the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during the specific gaming state. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the effect of the first variable effect at the start of the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead effect effect (effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a) in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) in the specific gaming state. While the effect to be performed) is not executed, the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect), so that the variable display of the first special symbol (first) is performed during the specific game state. The rate at which the look-ahead effect effect is executed differs depending on whether the variation display (variation effect) is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is executed during the specific game state. There is. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

The look-ahead effect effect may be executed when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed in the specific game state. In this case, the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed. The ratio should be lower than when (second variation effect) is executed.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed in the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, so that in the normal gaming state, the second It is easier to execute the vibration effect when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead operation effect is not executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state, the first It is easier for the second movable member 74 to operate (operate) when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, since the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed in the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, the first It is easier to execute the vibration effect when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) can be executed in the variation display (first variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. In the specific game state, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) is not executed in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect), so that the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is performed during the normal game state. It is more difficult to execute the look-ahead zone effect (background change) when the variation display (first variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed during the specific game state than when is executed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) is not executed in the variation display (first variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific gaming state, while the second Since the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the variable display of the special symbol (second variable effect), the variation display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the specific game state. When the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is executed during the specific game state, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

The look-ahead zone effect may be executed when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed in the specific game state. In this case, the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed. The ratio should be lower than when (second variation effect) is executed.

According to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye effect can be executed in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect), but in the specific game state. For example, since the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect), the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during the specific game state. When the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the specific gaming state, the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), while the second special symbol is displayed. Since the look-ahead chance eye effect can be executed in the variable display (second variable effect), the specific game is more than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the specific game state. When the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is executed during the state, it is easier to execute the look-ahead chance eye effect. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed in the specific game state, the look-ahead chance eye effect may be executed. In this case, the variation of the second special symbol may be executed. The ratio should be lower than when the display (second variation effect) is executed.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice type determination table referred to for determining a continuous advance notice type in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 33 is a diagram showing effect modes D to G (specific game state). ) Is a diagram showing a continuous notice effect determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the continuous advance notice type determination table is associated with a look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), a selection rate (%) of each continuous advance notice type, and a selected continuous advance notice type. , Continuous notice type includes "non-execution" that does not execute continuous notice effect, "look-ahead operation effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous notice effect, "look-ahead effect effect", and "look-ahead vibration effect". , "Look-ahead zone effect", "Look-ahead chance eye effect", "Look-ahead effect effect & Look-ahead vibration effect", "Look-ahead operation effect & Look-ahead zone effect" are provided. Has been done.

For example, when the look-ahead designation command (scheduled fluctuation pattern) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined in 79%, and 6 % Is "look-ahead effect effect", 5% is "look-ahead chance eye effect", 4% is "look-ahead motion effect", 3% is "look-ahead vibration effect", and 2%. The "look-ahead zone effect" is determined by, and the "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect" is determined by 1%.

(Continuous notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 35 shows a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for the effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure.

The continuous advance notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of reserved special symbols, the look-ahead specification command (scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each advance notice scenario, and the selected advance notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (4 fluctuations before, 3 fluctuations before, 2 fluctuations before, 1 fluctuation before), and the production mode of the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "weak notice" means that the effect mode differs depending on the continuous advance type, and in the case of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 performs a weak operation that emits light in blue and operates, and a weak operation sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect effect, the blue effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a and the blue effect sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button. The vibrator for vibrating 17 vibrates slightly for only one second, and the effect button 17 blinks white. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a blue zone image (zone background image) is displayed and the effect button 17 flashes white. The zone sound effect is output, and in the case of the look-ahead chance eye effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement (for example, "224", "668", etc.) by an even number of symbols.

The "strong notice" means that the effect mode differs depending on the continuous advance notice type, and in the case of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 performs a strong operation that emits light in red and operates, and a strong operation sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect effect, the red effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a and the red effect sound effect is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button is displayed. The vibrator for vibrating 17 vibrates strongly for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 blinks in red. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red thermal zone image (zone background image) is displayed and at the same time. , The heat zone sound effect is output, and in the case of the look-ahead chance eye effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement (for example, "335", "779", etc.) by an odd number of symbols. be.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice or a strong notice is not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), or a scenario during the advance change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set in the scenario.

The first feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that when a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effect is executed rather than when one type of continuous advance notice effect is executed. However, there is a point that the expectation of big hits is high. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As a second feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is easy to execute the continuous advance notice effect (the execution rate is high), that is, the jackpot expectation when the continuous advance notice effect is executed is low. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, instead of making the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect different between the effect modes A to C and the effect modes D to G, for example, the effect mode B executes the continuous advance notice effect more than the effect mode A. The execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the effect modes A and C, such as making it easier to perform. For example, the effect mode E makes it easier to execute the continuous advance notice effect than the effect mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the effect modes D to G. By doing so, the jackpot expectation of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). However, when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance eye effect, and the look-ahead operation effect) are performed. ) Is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance eye effect, and the look-ahead) are performed. The point that the operation effect and the look-ahead zone effect) are easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state). In the case where the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance eye effect, and the look-ahead) are performed. The point that the operation effect and the look-ahead zone effect) are easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the ultra-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) (look-ahead result). In the case where the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the look-ahead operation effect and the look-ahead zone effect) Is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the ultra-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are more than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration effect without displaying the validity period of the effect button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easy to be executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation). Therefore, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) in which the stay period tends to be longer than in the production modes D to G (specific game state), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the look-ahead vibration effect, which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved. Further, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the look-ahead vibration effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect may be more easily executed (execution ratio is higher) in the effect modes D to G than in the effect modes A to C. Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the effect mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration effect is set between the effect modes A and C. It may be different, and if it is in a specific gaming state, the look-ahead vibration effect is easier to be executed in the effect mode D than in the effect mode E to G, so that the look-ahead vibration is performed between the effect modes D to G. The execution ratio of the production may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) Is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), and a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). In the case of the look-ahead result), it is difficult to execute the look-ahead vibration effect (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in the production modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the production modes A to C (normal game state), the look-ahead vibration production can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

As the ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). The point that the look-ahead operation effect is easy to be executed (the execution rate is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, in the production modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the production modes A to C (normal game state), the look-ahead vibration production can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is the case where the continuous advance notice effect that ends with one variable effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). Rather than the case where the continuous notice effect that ends with one variable effect is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the reach effect (normal reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is the case where the continuous advance notice effect that ends with two variable effects is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Rather than the case where the continuous notice effect that ends with two variable effects is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the reach effect (normal reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that when the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (the number of holdings is 2 to 4), the effect is produced. Compared to the case where the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the modes A to C (normal game state), the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is performed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). When it is executed, it is more difficult to execute the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) in the variable effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). , In the production modes A to C (normal game state), when the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous advance notice effect. , SPSP reach production) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state). , When the continuous notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the reach effect with a high expectation of big hit in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect (for example). , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is the same movable member in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Although it is possible to execute the look-ahead operation effect using (the second movable member 74), the look-ahead operation effect can be performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point that the jackpot expectation when executed is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the look-ahead operation effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the deciding effect (100%) is higher than the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 used in the deciding effect described later (0%). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the pre-reading motion effect is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of operating the second movable member 74 in the strong notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the first movable member 73 may be operated. Even in this case, when the look-ahead operation effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is higher than the ratio of operating the first movable member 73. , It is preferable that the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 is higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the look-ahead vibration effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio of the effect button 17 to the normal state (0%) is higher than the ratio of the effect button 17 to the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity that the effect button 17 is in the projecting state (it is in the projecting state only in the determined effect described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated as a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the effect button 17 to the protruding state is higher than the ratio. , It is better to set the ratio to the normal state to be higher.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 70a). In the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the look-ahead operation effect (weak movement of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect effect (display of a blue effect image around the effect symbol 70a) are executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second of the effect button 17), which is executed without displaying the operation promotion image, is executed. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The nineteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 70a). During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead operation effect (strong operation of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect effect (display of a red effect image around the effect symbol 70a) are executed. There is a point that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed than in the case of the above case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution process of the effect control unit)
FIG. 36 will explain the continuous advance notice effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect execution process this time is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect (look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect) stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and steps. In E540-3, it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is stored. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process is moved to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a advance notice pattern (type of continuous advance notice effect, weak advance notice, strong advance notice) to be executed in this variable effect according to the advance notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous advance notice effect command corresponding to the determined advance notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous advance notice effect according to the determined advance notice pattern is executed. When this process is completed, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

(Lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process is moved to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed, and if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub RAM 130c. Step E550-6 assumes that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the inability to normally receive the power recovery or winning command (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures, the look-ahead specification command) that will be cleared. Move the process.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the icon change timing. If it is the icon change timing, the process is moved to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the lamp change effect execution process this time is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon. It will be.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp change effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp change effect is produced. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process is transferred to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, sets the lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and performs the lamp change effect execution process this time. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect that has been executed ends.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the light emitting mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR is changed in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect to change the lamp. It is designed to perform production. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the effect of changing the icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power supply is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to be done. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the power supply is restored as in the icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variable effect started after the power supply is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the prior fluctuation to the change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You may do so.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit)
A variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process is executed in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect process.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step E610-1, and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (FIGS. 39, 40) according to the current effect mode in step E610-2. .. The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a determines one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns with reference to the selected variation effect pattern determination table, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variation effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variation effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C referred to for determining a variation effect pattern in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an effect mode. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode D to G (specific game state) which is referred for determining the variation effect pattern in D to G.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the variation effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and a selected variation effect pattern for reference. The effect configuration in each variable effect pattern is described as.

The "variation" in the column of the effect configuration indicates that the normal variation display in which the reach state by the effect symbol 70a is not formed is executed.
The "shortened variation" indicates that the shortened variation display is executed, which is shorter than the normal variation display and does not form a reach state.
The “L fluctuation” indicates that a long fluctuation display in which the reach state is not formed longer than the normal fluctuation display is executed.

The "pseudo-failure" is a pseudo-continuous effect after performing an effect of inciting whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a and then re-variating it during one special symbol variation display is performed. It is shown that the pseudo-continuous failure effect that results in the fact that is not performed is executed.
The "pseudo-success" indicates that the pseudo-ream success effect, which is the result of the pseudo-ream effect, is executed after the effect of inciting whether or not the pseudo-ream effect is executed is performed.
"(Variation-> Pseudo-success) x 2" is an effect in which a pseudo-ream success effect is executed, which is the result of a pseudo-ream effect being performed after a fanning effect that incites whether or not the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Is set as one set, and it is shown that the production is performed in two sets.
"(Variation-> Pseudo-success) x 3" is an effect in which a pseudo-ream success effect is executed, which is the result of a pseudo-ream effect being performed after a fanning effect that incites whether or not the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Is set as one set, and it is shown that the production is performed in three sets.

“N reach” indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
The “N“ 7 ”reach” indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of the “7”.
The “SP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
The "special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
The “SPSP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

The "SP development" indicates that the development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
“SPSP development” indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SPSP reach effect is executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that full rotation reach is executed is executed.

“CI” indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects having different jackpot expectations is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
The "decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot game is executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the decision effect, the decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the decision effect, the decision success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed.

"Loss" is to form a lost roll (a lost display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial roll described later) by the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers that do not include characters, and temporarily stop. Is shown.
The "c symbol loss" is a temporary stop in which a loss roll (a loss display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial roll described later) is formed by the effect symbol 70a of the display mode including the character. It is shown that.
The “IC” indicates that an eye-catching effect (stop-indicating effect) in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device is executed.
The "symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot roll (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") is formed by the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers that do not include the character, and the temporary stop is performed.
The “c symbol alignment” indicates that a jackpot appearance (a jackpot display mode such as “222” or “777”) is formed by the effect symbol 70a of the display mode including the character, and the temporary stop is performed.

The "re-lottery" is whether or not the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the jackpot (big hit display mode) becomes a jackpot advantageous to the player (from an even-numbered effect symbol that is usually a jackpot) to a probable change jackpot. After inciting whether or not it will be an odd number of production symbols and whether or not it will be a production symbol of "7" where the most advantageous jackpot game is executed), a promotion success production that will be an advantageous jackpot is performed. , It is shown that a re-lottery effect is performed, such as a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous big hit.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 4 seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second is executed.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect modes A to C (normal game state) shown in FIG. 39, the special symbol 00 (missing) and the variation effect patterns 03 (normal reach effect) and 05-06 (SP reach effect) are shown. In this case, the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the odd-numbered effect symbol 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 65%, which is an odd number other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 30%, and the ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 5%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable effect patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect being performed with an even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%. ..
In the case of special symbol 02 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 70a is 60%, and odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio of reach production performed at 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 70a is 6%, and odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect being performed at 70a is 4%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed at the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 90%.
In the case of the special symbol 03 (probability change jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 60%, and "7". The percentage of reach effects being performed with an odd number of effect symbols 70a other than "" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 26 to 27 (special SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable effect pattern 27 (special SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%.

In the variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes D to G (specific game state) shown in FIG. 40, in the case of the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variable effect pattern 32 (special SP reach effect), the even numbered effect symbols 70a The ratio of reach production is 100%.
In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probability variation jackpot), 03 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect pattern 33 (special SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect with even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%. It has become.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 36 (normal reach effect) and 38 to 42 (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 60%. The percentage of reach effects being performed with an odd number of effect symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 100%. ..

In the case of special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 70a is 60%, and odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio of reach production performed at 70a is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 3%, and the odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect being performed at 70a is 2%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed at the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of the special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 70a is 20%, and an odd number of effects other than "7" is produced. The ratio of the reach effect being performed by the symbol 70a is 30%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 50%.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the SP reach effect (excluding the special SP reach effect) or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. An eye-catching effect suggesting that this is executed is executed, and the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display mode of the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that, in the case of a big hit, the determination success effect is executed and the pattern alignment is achieved, and the determination is successful after the symbols are aligned. There is a point that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the case of a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in the variation effect pattern that is a big hit, when the effect symbols 70a that do not include characters are aligned, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. There is a point that a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the strong vibration that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second when the effect symbols 70a including the character are aligned (c symbols are aligned). One point is that the production (big hit confirmation vibration production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the reach effect (normal reach) with an odd-numbered effect symbol 70a (an effect symbol that becomes a probable change jackpot by becoming a jackpot) other than "7". The point that the ratio of reach production with even-numbered production symbols 70a (the production design that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit) is higher than the ratio of production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when an odd number of production symbols 70a other than "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that the reach effect is performed with the even-numbered effect symbol 70a (the effect symbol that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit). The point that the ratio of reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) in the production symbol 70a of "7" (the production symbol that becomes the most advantageous probabilistic jackpot by becoming a big hit) is lower. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the big hit is achieved by the production symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the reach effect (normal reach) with an odd number of effect symbols 70a (an effect symbol that becomes a probable change jackpot by becoming a jackpot) other than "7". Reach production (normal reach production, SP) with the production symbol 70a of "7" (the production design that becomes the most advantageous odd-numbered jackpot by becoming a jackpot) rather than the ratio of production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) The point that the ratio of reach production and SPSP reach production) is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the big hit is achieved by the production symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that "7" is more important than the case where the reach effect is executed by the odd number effect symbols 70a other than the even number effect symbols 70a and "7". The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a of. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation as to which type of effect symbol the reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the ninth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the reach effect (SPSP reach effect) can be easily executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7" (the effect symbol that becomes the most advantageous probabilistic jackpot by becoming a big hit). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), even if the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is confirmed. However, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the big hit is confirmed when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 70a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), the eye-catching effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol). While the stop suggestion effect) can be executed, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the eye catch effect (stop suggestion effect) is not executed in the first variable effect, so that the first variable effect is performed during the normal game state. An eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) depending on whether (1st special symbol variation display) is executed or 1st variation effect (1st special symbol variation display) is executed during a specific gaming state. Is executed at different rates. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the effect of the first variable effect in the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). While the eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) is not executed, the eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) can be executed when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) is executed differs between the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state and the case where the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It has become like. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the effect of the effect related to the second variation effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The thirteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state). In, the pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect (the effect that the flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) can be executed, while in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the first When the 1-variable effect (variable display of the 1st special symbol) is executed, the pseudo-ream fanning effect and the pseudo-ream effect are not executed. The ratio at which the pseudo-ream fanning effect and the pseudo-ream effect are executed differs depending on whether the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the effect of the first variable effect in the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). In, the pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect (the effect that the flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) are not executed, while the second variable effect (the second special symbol variable display) is executed. In that case, since the pseudo-ream fanning effect and the pseudo-ream effect can be executed, the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state and the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state. The ratio at which the pseudo-ream fanning effect and the pseudo-ream effect are executed differs depending on the case. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the effect of the effect related to the second variation effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The fifteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state). Is capable of executing a determined effect (effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective), while a second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. In that case, the determined effect (effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Is not executed (effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective), while the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. (Effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventeenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is easier to execute the re-lottery effect than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is easier to execute the re-lottery effect when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed than. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the reach effect is always executed in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed may be provided.

In addition, it is decided that if you temporarily stop with a loss after the cut-in effect or the decision failure effect, it will be a loss, but after the cut-in effect or the decision failure effect, it will be a big hit. May be executed.

Further, the eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) may be executed when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. In this case, the second variation effect is executed. It is preferable that the ratio is lower than when the variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

Further, instead of executing only the eye-catching effect as the stop suggestion effect, the effect symbol 70a is suggested to be stopped by executing the light emission effect effect of displaying the light emission effect on the effect symbol 70a when the C symbols are aligned. In this case, when the first variation effect is executed in the specific game state, the light emission effect effect is not executed when the loss effect symbol is temporarily stopped, and the light emission effect effect is not executed when the jackpot effect symbol is temporarily stopped. When the second variation effect is executed in the specific game state, the light emission effect effect is not executed when the loss effect symbol is temporarily stopped without the reach effect, and the reach effect is performed and the loss effect symbol is executed. When is temporarily stopped or the jackpot effect symbol is temporarily stopped, a light emission effect effect may be executed.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, the pseudo continuous effect (the effect that the flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) is executed. In this case, the ratio may be lower than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

(Timer production decision processing)
Next, the timer effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the current variation effect pattern in step E620-1, and in step E620-2, the reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) higher than the SP reach effect is executed. Determine if it is done. When the reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is executed, the process is moved to step E620-3, and when the reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is not executed, the timer effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the number of event timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variation effect using the event timer number determination table (see FIG. 42). do. Specifically, the big hit lottery result, the variation effect pattern, etc. are collated with the event timer number determination table. The details of this event timer number determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

The event timer effect suggests that one of a plurality of suggestion events (excluding icon changes) that expect the jackpot game to be executed in the process of executing the variable effect occurs, and the timing at which the suggestion event occurs. However, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed, and it is now possible to determine the type of suggestion event when the suggestion event occurs. There is.

Suggestion events include normal reach effect, pseudo-ream, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, jackpot symbol stop, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E620-4 whether or not the number of times of the event timer effect determined is to execute the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is executed (the number of event timer effects is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process is transferred to step E620-5, and the event timer effect is not executed (event timer effect). If the number of productions is "0 times"), the timer effect determination process this time is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of times of the event timer effect determined in step E620-5 is one. If it is once, the process is transferred to step E620-6, and if it is twice instead of once, the process is transferred to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub CPU 130a uses the suggestion event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 43) to suggest the suggestion event by the event timer effect and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. To decide. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the suggestion event determination table for one timer. The details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

The timer types include a short timer, which is a classification of short timer time, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer time, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer time. The timer time set by the three types of timers is short timer <middle timer <long timer.

In step E620-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect pattern command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect is performed during the variation effect.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a uses the first suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44A), and the suggestion event suggested by the first event timer effect, and the timer Determine the timer type classified by type and length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the first suggestion event determination table for two timers. The details of the first suggestion event determination table for the two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 44 (a).

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the first event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the first event timer effect is performed during the variation effect.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a uses the second suggestion event determination table for the second timer (see FIG. 44 (b)), and the suggestion event suggested by the second event timer effect, and the timer Determine the timer type classified by length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the second suggestion event determination table for two timers. The details of the second suggestion event determination table for this timer twice will be described later with reference to FIG. 44 (b).

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. are collated with the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the suggestion event and the timer effect pattern command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the second event timer effect is performed during the variation effect.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a table for determining the number of event timers, which is referred to when determining the number of times the event timer effect is executed during the variable effect. The event timer number determination table is associated with a jackpot lottery result, a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each number of event timer effects, and the number of event timer effects to be determined.

The number of event timer effects includes "0 times" when the event timer effect is not executed, "1 time" when the event timer effect is executed once, and 2 times when the event timer effect is executed. Three types of "twice" are set.

The first feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the event timer effect is easier to be executed and the jackpot expectation is lower in the case of the jackpot than in the case of the jackpot lottery result being lost. The event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the reach effect with a high expectation of big hit is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is likely to be larger in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of times the event timer effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the event timer is executed when the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed rather than when the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. The point is that the number of times the production is executed tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the event timer number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is the special SP reach effect rather than the case where the reach effect other than the special SP reach (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. Is more difficult to execute the timer effect (update effect) during the variable effect.

That is, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, the reach effect other than the special SP reach is executed, while the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. When (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the special SP reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect other than the special SP reach, so that the first change is lost during the normal gaming state. It is more difficult to execute the timer effect (update effect) when the first variable effect which is lost during the specific game state is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first variation effect in the normal gaming state in which the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

In addition, the first variation effect (variation of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the specific game state is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the normal gaming state is executed. It is more difficult to execute the timer effect (update effect) when the display) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first variation effect in the normal gaming state in which the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the special SP reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect other than the special SP reach, while the special SP reach effect is executed. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the reach effect other than the special SP reach is executed, so that the first variation effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the timer effect (update effect) when the second variation effect is executed during the specific game state than when the second variation effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the second variation effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

Although the timer effect is executed when the special SP reach effect is executed, the timer effect may not be executed when the special SP reach effect is executed. In this case, the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, and the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the specific gaming state. If it is executed, the timer effect will not be executed.

(Suggested event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed once during the variation effect, and a suggestion event determination table for one timer, which is referred to when the timer type is determined. The suggestion event determination table for one timer is associated with a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type.

Seven types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-ream, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, and jackpot symbol stop.

Further, three types of timer types are set: a short timer, which is a classification of a short timer time, a middle timer, which is a classification of a long timer time, and a long timer, which is a classification of a long timer time. The timer time set by the three types of timers is short timer <middle timer <long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the types of suggestion events are set to be different according to the variation effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that an event executed at an early stage of the variation effect (for example, a pseudo) as one event timer effect executed during the variation effect. The point that the event (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, jackpot symbol stop) is more likely to be determined as a suggestion event than the event (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, jackpot symbol stop) that is executed at a later time of the variable effect. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the suggestion event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the fluctuation effect pattern with a higher expectation of big hit is from an event (for example, pseudo-ream, normal reach) executed at an earlier stage of the variation effect. However, an event executed at a later time of the fluctuation effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, jackpot symbol stop) is more likely to be determined as a suggestion event. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier it is to determine the timer type for which a longer timer time is set (big hit expectation). The higher the degree, the easier it is to determine the long timer as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be.

The fifth feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that of a predetermined event (for example, normal reach, pseudo-ream, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, jackpot symbol stop). When the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific event (valid period) is executed, the effect button is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect than when the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence is executed. The point that 17 tends to be in a special state can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the final phase of the variable effect is when the middle timer is determined rather than when the short timer is determined as the timer type. There is a point that the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) at the (late stage). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the suggested event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 43 is that the final phase of the variable effect is when the long timer is determined rather than when the middle timer is determined as the timer type. At the end of the game), the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Suggested event determination table for 2 timers)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variation effect, and a suggestion event determination table for the timer twice, which is referred to when the timer type is determined. The suggestion event determination table for two timers is associated with a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggested event to be determined, and a timer type.

Note that FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram showing a first suggestion event type and a first suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the timer type, and FIG. 44 (b). ) Is a diagram showing a second suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggestion event and the type of the timer.

Seven types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-ream, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, valid period, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot symbol stop.

Further, three types of timer types are set: a short timer, which is a classification of a short timer time, a middle timer, which is a classification of a long timer time, and a long timer, which is a classification of a long timer time. The timer time set by the three types of timers is short timer <middle timer <long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that the types of suggestion events are set to be different according to the variation effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second feature of the suggestion event determination table for the two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that the two event timer effects executed during the variation effect include an event executed at an early stage of the variation effect. The point is that both the events executed at the late stage of the fluctuation effect are easily determined as the suggestion events. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the third feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44, the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier it is to determine the timer type in which the longer timer time is set (the longer the timer time is set). The higher the jackpot expectation, the easier it is to determine the long timer as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be.

Further, as the fourth feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44, it is more specific than the case where the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, SPSP reach effect) is executed. When the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of the event (valid period) is executed, the effect button 17 is more likely to be in a special state in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the fifth feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44, the case where the long timer is determined rather than the case where the short timer and the middle timer are determined as the timer type. However, there is a point that the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table referred to when determining an update pattern (effect mode) of a timer. The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, the distribution ratio (%) for each update pattern, and the determined update pattern. For reference, the timer time for each update pattern, the timer display mode, The timer display position and the feasibility of the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting are described.

The "normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it becomes 0 seconds.
The "special pattern" means that the timer (seconds) is rewound after the timer displayed in the predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it becomes 0 seconds. This is a special update pattern in which the data is subtracted by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1 <normal pattern 2 <normal pattern 3.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11 <normal pattern 12 <normal pattern 13.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is as follows: normal pattern 21 <normal pattern 22 <normal pattern 23 <normal pattern 24 <normal pattern 25 <special pattern 1 <normal pattern 26 <normal pattern 27 <special pattern 2 < It is a normal pattern 28.

In this way, in the timer effect, multiple timer times (update patterns) are set, but by counting down to 0 seconds, the timer effect counts down to a predetermined event (icon change effect, various reach effect, zone effect, count up). Since it is an effect that suggests the occurrence of the effect, the validity period of the effect button 17, the stop display of the jackpot symbol, etc., and the timing when a predetermined event occurs, any timer time (update pattern) can be used. , The count value is counted up to the final arrival point (0 seconds in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the update pattern has a longer timer time in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result regardless of the timer type. There is a point that is easy to determine. By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be.

The second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that even if the timer time is the same, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display mode (character color) of the timer. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the display mode of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the jackpot expectation degree related to the display mode (character color) of the timer is white <blue <red <rainbow (big hit confirmed).

The third feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the longer the timer type is determined, the more the timer display mode (character color) is. By doing so, it is possible to impress that the higher the timer type in which the longer timer time is determined, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the character color is exemplified as the display mode of the timer, it may be a font in addition to the character color, it may be a decorative part for decorating the timer, or it may be a composite thereof.

As the fourth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, a plurality of character colors (white, blue, red, rainbow) are set as the display mode of the timer, and the type of the character color is the final icon. The same color as a part of the icon color types (white, blue, green, red, zebra, rainbow) set as the display mode is set. That is, the icon color set as the icon final display mode includes all the character colors set as the timer display mode. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand which character color timer has the highest expectation of a big hit, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the order of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the color type is also common to the icon color type set as the icon final display mode and the character color type set as the timer display mode.

The type of character color set as the display mode of the timer and the type of icon color set as the final display mode of the icon may be exactly the same type.

In addition to the final display mode of the icon, an effect (other effect) that suggests the jackpot expectation level using the display (emission) color is provided, and all the character colors set as the display mode of the timer or all of the character colors or Some may set the same color. Also in this case, it is preferable that the order of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the color type is also common to the display color of the timer and other effects.
Here, the other effects include, for example, a plurality of dialogue display colors may be provided in the dialogue advance notice effect, and the effect color and the emission color of the frame lighting device 10 change each time the step progresses in the step-up advance notice effect. It may be something that changes, and various productions can be assumed.

The fifth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the jackpot expectation differs depending on the display position of the timer (the closer to the center of the screen, the higher the jackpot expectation). By doing so, the player becomes interested in the display position of the timer, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the display size of the timer differs depending on the display position of the timer, it can be said that the jackpot expectation differs depending on the timer display size (the larger the size, the higher the jackpot expectation).

The sixth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the timer subtraction starts after the standby display is performed, as compared with the case where the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is not performed. There is a point that the expectation of big hit is higher when it is done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player even before the timer is subtracted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when the timer times (total) are the same, the jackpot expectation is higher when the timer is updated with a special pattern than with the normal pattern. There is a point that it becomes high. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of whether or not the pattern is a special pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the rewinding time in the special pattern tends to be longer in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost (depending on the timer time after rewinding). (The degree of expectation of big hits is different). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the rewinding time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the initial timer time in the special pattern and the timer time after rewinding are different (the timer time after rewinding is shorter than the initial timer time). Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to effectively arouse the expectation of the player until the rewinding is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an event suggested by the timer effect and an event not suggested by the timer effect (big hit notice effect) are set. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable production, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

It can also be said that the number of events suggested and events not suggested by the timer effect (big hit notice effect) is different. Specifically, the number of events suggested by the timer effect is larger than the number of events not suggested (big hit notice effect). It should be noted that the number of events that are not suggested by the timer effect may be larger than the number of events that are suggested.

In the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, it is always counted up to "0 seconds", but it may end in the middle without being counted up to "0 seconds". Is also good. If the event ends in the middle of the process, it is sufficient not to suggest any predetermined event (so-called "gase production").

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect of subtracting the timer (quantity) displayed on the image display device is executed as the update effect, but the quantity image displayed on the image display device is added. Then, the count-up effect suggesting the jackpot expectation (for example, the type of reach effect) may be executed according to the quantity indicated by the finally displayed quantity image. Even in this case, whether or not to execute the count-up effect is the same as the roulette notice effect (in the case of the special SP reach effect, the reach effect other than the special SP reach effect is executed, as compared with the case where the reach effect other than the special SP reach effect is executed. It is better to decide (so that the count-up effect is difficult to execute).

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 46, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process is a variation effect pattern determination process (variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command) in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process. Is executed after the process of determining.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step E650-1, and in step E650-2, the jackpot game is executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach. The pre-reach advance notice determination table (FIGS. 47 and 48) for determining the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect expected by the player is selected, and the advance notice pattern is determined. The details of the pre-reach notice decision table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect is to execute the dialogue advance notice effect. If the dialogue advance notice effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-4, and if the dialogue advance notice effect is not to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-6.

"Serif notice effect" generates a valid period during a variable effect (high-speed variable period), and suggests a jackpot expectation to the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the passage of the effective time. It is a kind of jackpot advance notice effect in which the dialogue image is displayed and the voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the voice output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining a dialogue advance notice pattern for the dialogue advance notice effect to determine the dialogue advance notice pattern, and in step E650-5, the dialogue notice pattern is determined. Set the dialogue warning effect command according to the warning pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue advance notice pattern is executed during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialogue notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect is to execute the step-up advance notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-7, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process is transferred to step E650-9.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the valid period of the effect button 17 during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). It is a kind of jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until any of the steps (stages) is reached.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining a step-up notice pattern for the step-up notice effect, determines the step-up notice pattern, and steps E650-. In 8, the step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialogue notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the pseudo-continuous effect, the process is transferred to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the process is transferred to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern for pseudo-continuous effect, determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and steps E650-11. In, a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes the development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, full rotation development effect). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the development effect, the process is transferred to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the development effect, the process is transferred to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect, determines the development effect pattern, and in step E650-14, the development effect. Set the development effect command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the development production pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the roulette notice using the roulette notice determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining whether or not to execute the roulette notice, and in step E650-16, the roulette notice effect is produced. To determine whether to execute. When the roulette notice effect is executed, the process is transferred to step E650-17, and when the roulette notice effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E650-19.

"Roulette notice effect" means that one of a plurality of types of options is roulette depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period before the start of the reach effect or after the start of the reach effect. The effect is selected in this way, and the type of the selected option suggests the effect to be executed after that (the effect to be executed most recently).

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the stop option determination table (see FIG. 54) for determining the stop option of the roulette notice to determine the stop option, and in step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a corresponds to the stop option. Set the roulette notice effect command in the transmission buffer. As a result, the roulette notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the roulette advance notice effect according to the stop option is executed during the variation effect. The details of the stop option determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes a reach effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the reach effect, the process is moved to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the reach effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes the cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the cut-in effect, the process is transferred to step E650-21, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the cut-in effect, the process is transferred to step E650-23.

In step E650-21, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 55 and 56) for determining a cut-in effect pattern for the cut-in effect, determines the cut-in effect pattern, and steps. In E650-22, a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the determined effect, the process is transferred to step E650-24, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the determined effect, the process is transferred to step E650-26.

In step E650-24, the sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 57) for determining a determined effect pattern for the determined effect, determines the determined effect pattern, and in step E650-25, determines the determined effect. Set the decision production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the decision effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the decision effect according to the decision effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the decision effect pattern decision table will be described later.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes the re-lottery effect, the process is transferred to step E650-27, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes the re-lottery effect, the process is transferred to step E650-29.

In step E650-27, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern for the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-28. In, the re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect according to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that can execute (become a big hit) a definite effect that deterministically notifies that the current variable effect pattern is a big hit. If it is a variable effect pattern in which the final effect can be executed, the process is moved to step E650-30, and if it is not a variable effect pattern in which the final effect can be executed, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E650-30, the sub CPU 130a selects a definite effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining a definite effect pattern for the definite effect, determines the definite effect pattern, and in step E650-31, definite effect. The confirmation effect command according to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the jackpot notice effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the final effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the final effect according to the final effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the finalized effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table referred to when determining a advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect for the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the effect mode D to D. It is a figure which shows the pre-reach advance notice determination table which is referred to when the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect for G (specific game state) is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each advance notice pattern, and the selected advance notice pattern are associated with the pre-reach advance notice determination table. There is.

There are three notice patterns for the pre-reach notice: "no notice" where the pre-reach notice effect is not executed, "line notice effect" where the line notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" where the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the above-mentioned symbol alignment is executed) is no notice <line notice effect <step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the pre-reach notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the big hit determination result, and the big hit expectation. It is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the variation effect pattern with a low degree is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more lost than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In case of pre-reach notice effect (both the dialogue advance notice effect that can execute the vibration effect with the effect period of the effect button 17 and the step-up advance notice effect that can execute the vibration effect without the effect period of the effect button 17) Is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are larger than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). Even in this case, when the variable effect pattern is a pattern for executing the normal reach effect and a pattern for executing the SP reach effect, it is difficult to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the step-up without the valid period of the effect button 17 is performed as compared with the case where the dialogue advance notice effect with the valid period of the effect button 17 is executed. When the advance notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the above-mentioned symbol alignment is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect is executed in the determined effect described later, etc.) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed during the normal gaming state (long variation). When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that is lost is executed (long variable effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), it is better than the effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern. There is a point that it is difficult to execute the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) accompanied by the valid period (operation) of the effect button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the normal gaming state (long variation). When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (special SP reach effect pattern), the effect is better than the effect pattern and the reach effect pattern other than the special SP reach effect pattern. There is a point that it is difficult to execute the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed during the normal gaming state (long variation). When the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that is lost is executed (long variable effect pattern, special SP reach effect) rather than the effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). In the case of the pattern), it is difficult to execute the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) accompanied by the valid period (operation) of the effect button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the normal gaming state (special SP). When the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (special SP reach effect pattern) in the specific game state, it is better than the reach effect pattern other than the reach effect pattern). There is a point that it is difficult to execute the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) accompanied by the valid period (operation) of the effect button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed (long variation) during the specific gaming state. When the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost is executed (other than the long variable effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern), it is better than the effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern). The point that the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) accompanied by the valid period (operation) of the effect button 17 is easy to be executed (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the specific gaming state (special SP). When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (the long variable effect pattern and the reach effect pattern other than the special SP reach effect pattern), the effect is better than the reach effect pattern). The point that the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the button 17 is easy to be executed (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state (long variation effect pattern, special SP). The reach effect pattern) includes a point that the line advance notice effect can be executed, but the step-up advance notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the ratio of the pre-reach effect to be executed and the number of types of pre-reach effect that can be executed should be different depending on whether the first variable effect is executed or the second variable effect is executed in the normal gaming state. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The twelfth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state (long variation effect pattern, special SP). The reach effect pattern) includes a point that the line advance notice effect can be executed, but the step-up advance notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the ratio of the pre-reach effect to be executed and the number of types of pre-reach effect that can be executed should be different depending on whether the first variable effect is executed or the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the dialogue notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree (the rate at which the vibration effect accompanying the above-mentioned pattern alignment is executed, the decision success effect described later) is higher than when the step-up notice effect is executed. The rate at which the accompanying vibration effect is executed, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost during the normal gaming state is executed, or the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that is lost during the specific gaming state is executed. ) May not be executed, the dialogue advance notice effect (operation effect) or the step-up advance notice effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed, or the second variable effect (second) that becomes a big hit during the normal game state. Even when the special symbol variation display) is executed, or when the first variation effect (first special symbol variation display), which is a big hit during a specific game state, is executed, the dialogue notice effect (operation effect) or The step-up notice effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table referred to when determining the advance notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 49, the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and the selected dialogue notice pattern. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each dialogue notice pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the dialogue advance notice effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 3 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and the effect is displayed. It is an effect to display a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the column of dialogue production mode means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that the normal dialogue is output by voice. Shows.
"Chance dialogue (black)" indicates that the chance dialogue that may be a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and that the chance dialogue is output by voice.
The "reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in black characters, and that the reach line is output by voice.
The "reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in red characters, and that the reach line is output by voice.

The "heat dialogue (red)" indicates that the heat dialogue having a high possibility of executing the jackpot game is displayed in red characters and the heat dialogue is output by voice.
The "super heat dialogue (gold)" indicates that the intense heat dialogue with a very high possibility of executing the jackpot game is displayed in gold letters and the intense heat dialogue is output by voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means 1 from the time when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the dialogue (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly over a second is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is strong for 1 second from the start of the dialogue display (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a vibrating strong vibration effect is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each dialogue production mode is "normal dialogue" <"chance dialogue (black)" <"reach dialogue (black)" <"reach dialogue (red)" <"heat dialogue (red)" <"super heat" "Serif (Friday)" <"Confirmed line (Rainbow)". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" <"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 when a line with a high expectation of a big hit (more than a heat line) is displayed. There are points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the dialogue advance notice effect of the intense heat dialogue, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the heat dialogue, is executed than when the dialogue advance notice effect of the heat dialogue is executed. In the case of It can be mentioned that the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the effect button 17 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration effect executed when the dialogue (heat dialogue or higher) having a high expectation of big hit is displayed is a relatively short time. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a dialogue with a high jackpot expectation (more than a thermal dialogue) is displayed is 2 according to the jackpot expectation. There are various points. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, while the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that becomes a loss is executed (special SP reach effect). The pattern) includes a point that the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is not executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In the reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, while the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (the variable display of the second special symbol). The special SP reach effect pattern) includes a point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, while the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that becomes a loss is executed in the specific game state. (Long fluctuation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) includes a point that the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is not executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In the reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, while the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit in the specific gaming state. When it is executed (special SP reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the specific game state (long variation effect pattern, special). In the SP reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, while the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a loss, is executed (long variation). (Other than the effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern), there is a point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the specific game state (special SP reach effect pattern). In the case where the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, while the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (long variation effect pattern and special SP). The reach effect pattern other than the reach effect pattern) includes a point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, only the weak vibration effect or the strong vibration effect may be used, and the strong vibration effect is longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration effect. The vibration time of the may be lengthened.

In addition, the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue advance notice effect is the same in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). However, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and the jackpot expectation may be higher in the production modes D to G (specific gaming state). You may do it. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the production modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be.

Further, the valid period ends and the dialogue notice effect is executed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the valid time, but when the valid period ends due to the elapse of the valid time, the dialogue notice effect is performed. You may not execute it.

In addition, although it is designed to generate a valid period to execute the dialogue notice effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue notice effect without generating a valid period, and the vibration effect to be executed in that case is Only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

Further, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost during the normal game state is executed, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ratio is lower than that in the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss during the normal gaming state, is executed.

Further, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the normal game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. However, even in this case, it is better to set the ratio to a lower ratio than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss during the normal game state, is executed, and the loss occurs during the normal game state. It is preferable to set the ratio higher than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that is lost during the specific game state is executed, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ratio is lower than that in the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is lost during the specific gaming state, is executed.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the specific game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the dialogue advance notice effect. However, even in this case, it is better to set the ratio to a lower ratio than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit during the specific game state, is executed, and the rate is lost during the specific game state. It is preferable that the ratio is higher than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when determining a notice pattern for the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 50, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the selected step-up notice pattern. As a reference, the effect configuration (step-up (SU) effect mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern is described.

“1 → 2” in the column of the step-up effect mode indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3” indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3 → 4” indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5” indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
“1 → 2 → 3 → 5” means that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up effect mode, the effect time of the step effect before the last step effect is 1 second, and the effect time of the last step effect is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration at" 5 "(1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. Indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation of each step-up effect mode is "1 → 2" <"1 → 2 → 3" <"1 → 2 → 3 → 4" <"1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" <"1 → 2 → 3 → 5 ”.

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is performed, the effect button 17 does not generate an effective period. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect that vibrates the 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) having a high expectation of big hit is displayed is a relatively short time. There are some points. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with high jackpot expectation is displayed. There is only one type (weak vibration (1 second)) with a predetermined time). Therefore, in the step-up advance notice production in which it is difficult for the player to operate the effect button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of the vibration effect, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect mode and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more successful than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). , It is difficult to execute the step-up notice effect with low expectation (the execution rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more successful than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). , The point that the weak vibration effect is easy to be executed (the execution rate is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

As a sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more in the step-up notice effect than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). There is a high expectation of a big hit when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed during the normal gaming state (long variation effect pattern). And when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), the dialogue notice is better than the case (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In the production, the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is difficult to be executed (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the effect modes A to C (normal game state) of the effect buttons 17 do not have an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) in the step-up notice effect than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the vibration effect is executed may be increased. Even in this case, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the production modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

(Pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 51, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern are associated with the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo-continuous production ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 3 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and the effect is displayed. It is an effect to display a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button white" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is not protruding. Shown, "protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

The "pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-ream effect mode means that the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped without the pseudo-ream suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream as the central effect symbol 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. It indicates that the output pseudo-continuous failure effect is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the pseudo-successful symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream, is temporarily stopped, the success sound effect is output, and the second movable member 74 operates weakly, so that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo-ream success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means from the time when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for 1 second is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that the strong vibration effect is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"protruding button white". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each button state is "normal" <"protruding". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" <"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern having a high expectation of big hit. A point is that a vibration effect that vibrates the button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that it is a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of big hits, and the vibration effect executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed is a relatively short time. The point is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern with high jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation. There are two types depending on the type. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is the same effect device (effect button vibration) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Although it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using a motor, a second movable member 74, etc., the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). ) Has a higher expectation of a big hit when a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the effect mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the effect modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is the case of executing the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the second movable member 74, the second movable member 74, and the effect button 17. There is a case where a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the pseudo-continuous production and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state during the effective period when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, but the projecting state may not be achieved.

Further, there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous success effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

In addition, although the pseudo-ream success effect and the pseudo-ream failure effect are executed by generating a valid period, even if the pseudo-ream success effect and the pseudo-ream failure effect are executed without generating the valid period. Often, the vibration effect performed in the pseudo-ream success effect may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or a strong vibration effect for 1 second. You may do it.

Further, the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are more simulated using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C may have the same effect device (effect button vibration) than the effect mode A. The jackpot expectation when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the motor, the second movable member 74, etc. is executed may be made higher, and the effect mode D to the effect mode D may be higher than the effect mode G. Even if F has a higher expectation of a big hit when a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, although the motion effect using the second movable member 74 is executed in the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect), the motion effect using the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the motion effect using the second movable member 74 to be higher than that of the motion effect using the first movable member 73.

(Development production pattern determination table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the development effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the development effect type to be determined for the development effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each development effect pattern, and so on. The selected development effect patterns are associated with each other, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each development effect pattern is described as a reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"None" in the column of the effective suggestion effect indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and "Yes" means that the effective suggestion effect is executed, but the valid period does not occur after that. It indicates that it is an effective suggestion effect, and "yes" indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed and then the effective period occurs.

The "valid period (long press 4 seconds)" indicates that the development effect gradually progresses by pressing and holding the effect button 17, and ends when the valid period of the development effect elapses for 4 seconds.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathered at a specific position, an opaque effect is produced. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "normal button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is not protruding. Shown, "protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development effect mode is the SP development effect that outputs the first development sound effect while deriving and displaying the SP development pattern that suggests the development to the SP reach effect as a result of the development effect. Which indicates that.
The "SPSP notification" indicates that the SPSP development effect that outputs the second development sound effect is executed while deriving and displaying the SPSP development symbol that suggests the development to the SPSP reach effect as a result of the development effect. ..
"Full rotation notification" is to derive and display the full rotation development symbol that suggests the development to the full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect, and to execute the full rotation development effect that outputs the third development sound effect. Is shown.

"Weak movement" in the column of accessory movement means that the second movable member 74 emits blue light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (= at the end of the valid period) to perform a weak movement with a small movement width. Indicates that is executed.
"Strong movement" means that the second movable member 74 emits red light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (= at the end of the valid period), and a strong movement effect having a large swing width is executed. Is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various developed symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). Indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation of each motion effect is "weak motion" <"strong motion". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration" <"strong vibration".

The first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is produced. A point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect period of the button 17 to be generated and vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the SPSP development effect, is executed than the case where the SPSP development effect is executed. , The vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is easy to be executed (execution rate is high), and the effect button 17 is more likely than the case where the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development effect is executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the SPSP development effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that it is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. The point is that the vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in the fluctuation effect pattern with high expectation of big hit. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the same effect device (effect button vibration motor) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). , Second movable member 74, etc.) can be used to perform development effects (SPSP development effects, etc.), but the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is pointed out that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the development effect using the effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of the effect mode, and it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in the effect modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed during the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect). In), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect, while the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that becomes a loss is executed (special SP reach effect pattern). ) Refers to the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect, while the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (special SP reach effect pattern). ) Refers to the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed during the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect). In), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect, while the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the specific game state (). The special SP reach effect) includes the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). In the reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect, while the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the specific game state. When this is done (special SP reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the specific gaming state (special SP reach effect pattern). In the case where the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect, while the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost is executed (other than the special SP reach effect pattern). The point is that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the specific gaming state (special SP reach effect pattern). In the case where the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the development effect, while the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (reach other than the special SP reach effect pattern). The effect pattern) includes a point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

There are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the development effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

Further, the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are developed by using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the effect (SPSP development effect, etc.) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C may have the same effect device (effect button vibration motor) than the effect mode A. , The second movable member 74, etc.) may be used to increase the expectation of a big hit when the development effect is executed, and the effect modes D to F have the same effect than the effect mode G. The jackpot expectation may be increased when the development effect using the device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

Further, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost during the normal game state is executed, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. Even in this case, the ratio may be lower than that in the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss during the normal gaming state, is executed.

Further, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the normal game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. Even in this case, it is better to set the ratio to a lower ratio than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss during the normal game state, is executed, and the loss occurs during the normal game state. It is preferable to set the ratio higher than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that is lost during the specific game state is executed, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. Even in this case, the ratio may be lower than that in the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is lost during the specific gaming state, is executed.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed during the specific game state, the vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed in the development effect. Even in this case, it is better to set the ratio to a lower ratio than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit during the specific game state, is executed, and the result is lost during the specific game state. It is preferable to set the ratio higher than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed.

(Roulette notice decision table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a roulette notice determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the roulette notice effect executed during the variation effect. The roulette notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not the roulette advance notice effect can be executed.

The first feature of the roulette notice determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the special SP reach effect is more effective than the case where the reach effect other than the special SP reach (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. When it is executed, it is more difficult to execute the roulette notice effect during the variable effect.

That is, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, the reach effect other than the special SP reach is executed, while the first variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state. When (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the special SP reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect other than the special SP reach, so that the first change is lost during the normal gaming state. It is more difficult to execute the roulette notice effect (selection effect) when the first variable effect, which is lost during the specific game state, is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first variation effect in the normal gaming state in which the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

In addition, the first variation effect (variation of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the specific game state is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the normal gaming state is executed. It is more difficult to execute the roulette notice effect (selection effect) when the display) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first variation effect in the normal gaming state in which the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the special SP reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect other than the special SP reach, while the special SP reach effect is executed. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the reach effect other than the special SP reach is executed, so that the first variation effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the roulette notice effect (selection effect) when the second variation effect is executed during the specific game state than when the roulette advance effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the second variation effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

When the special SP reach effect is executed, the roulette notice effect is executed, but when the special SP reach effect is executed, the roulette notice effect may not be executed. .. In this case, the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, and the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the specific gaming state. If it is executed, the roulette notice effect will not be executed.

(Roulette notice stop option decision table)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a stop option determination table of the roulette notice, which is referred to when deciding the option to stop in the roulette notice effect. The stop option determination table of the roulette notice is associated with a variation effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) of the stop options, the stop options to be determined, and the types of options to be displayed.

Six types of stop options are set: "cass", "pseudo-ream", "chance", "SP", "SPSP", and "full rotation".

"Kas" is not an option that suggests any of the effects, but an option that suggests that the expectation of winning a big hit is low (loss).
The "pseudo-ream" is an option that suggests that the pseudo-ream effect is executed.
"Chance" is not an option that suggests any production, but an option that suggests that the expectation of winning a big hit is higher than that of "Kas".
“SP” is an option that suggests that the SP reach effect is executed.
“SPSP” is an option that suggests that the SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation" is an option that suggests that a full rotation reach effect is performed.

The first feature of the stop option determination table of the roulette notice shown in FIG. 54 is that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of displayed options. Specifically, the jackpot expectation is higher when the "cass" is not included than when the "cass" is included, and when the "chance" is not included, the jackpot is higher than when the "chance" is included. Expectations are high, and the jackpot expectation is higher when "full rotation" is included than when "full rotation" is not included. By doing so, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the jackpot expectation from the types of options, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the stop option determination table of the roulette notice shown in FIG. 54 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach). However, the point is that the roulette notice effect, which includes options with high jackpot expectations, is easier to execute (higher rate of execution) than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the stop option determination table of the roulette notice shown in FIG. 54 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach). However, in the specific game state, it is easier to execute the roulette notice effect including the options with high jackpot expectation than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP reach) (special SP reach). The rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the stop option determination table of the roulette notice shown in FIG. 54 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state (special SP reach). When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), it is easier to execute the roulette notice effect including the options with high jackpot expectation (the rate of execution is high). High) points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the stop option determination table of the roulette notice shown in FIG. 54 is that the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP reach). When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state (other than the special SP reach), it is easier to execute the roulette notice effect including the options with high jackpot expectation (other than the special SP reach). The rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of a cut-in effect for effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 56 is a diagram showing effect modes D to D. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect pattern determination table which is referred to when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect for G (specific game state) is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the cut-in effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut-in effect pattern are displayed. Are associated with each other, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each cut-in effect pattern is described as a reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the cut-in effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 4 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. Opaque effect button The image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "protruding button rainbow" is a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. The “protruding” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

The "blue cut-in" in the column of the cut-in effect mode is the execution of the blue cut-in effect in which the cut-in image of the blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
The “green cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the green cut-in effect in which the second cut-in sound effect is output is executed. ..
The “red cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the red cut-in effect in which the third cut-in sound effect is output is executed. ..

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a weak vibration effect of weak vibration is executed for 3 seconds from the beginning.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 extends for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect that vibrates strongly is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each cut-in is "blue cut-in" <"green cut-in" <"red cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" <"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when a cut-in image having a high expectation of a big hit is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the validity period of the effect button 17 is set. There is a point that a vibration effect that is generated and vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image with high jackpot expectation is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively. The point is that it has been a long time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform that the expectation of a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image having a high expectation of big hit is displayed (cut-in effect is executed). However, there are two types depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP). In the case of (other than reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) in the cut-in effect is greater than in the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a loss, is executed (special SP reach). The point that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP). In the case of (other than reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) in the cut-in effect is greater than in the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (special SP reach). The point that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP). In the case of (other than reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 in the cut-in effect is higher than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the specific game state (special SP reach). The point that (vibration effect) is easy to be executed (the ratio of being executed is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP). In the specific game state, the vibration of the effect button 17 in the cut-in effect is higher than that in the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (special SP reach). The point that (vibration effect) is easy to be executed (the ratio of being executed is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed in the specific gaming state (special SP). When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is a loss is executed (other than the special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is performed in the cut-in effect rather than the reach). The point that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed in the specific game state (special SP). When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed (other than the special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is performed in the cut-in effect rather than the reach). The point that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The vibration effect executed in the cut-in effect includes a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

Further, although the cut-in effect is executed by generating the valid period, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the valid period, and the vibration effect to be executed in that case is described. Only the weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only the strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be used, or only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or only the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that is lost during the normal gaming state is executed, or the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that is lost during the specific gaming state is executed. ) Is executed, the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) may not be executed in the cut-in effect, or the second variable effect (variation of the second special symbol) that becomes a big hit during the normal gaming state may be executed. Even when the display) is executed or the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit during the specific game state, is executed, the effect button 17 vibrates (vibration effect) in the cut-in effect. ) May not be done.

Further, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the cut-in effect including the effective suggestion effect may not be executed, or the effective suggestion effect may be executed. The cut-in effect that is not executed may be executed, or if the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the cut-in effect including the effective suggestion effect may be executed. May not be executed, or the cut-in effect in which the effective suggestion effect is not executed may be executed.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the determined effect.

As shown in FIG. 57, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the selected determined effect pattern are associated with the determined effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving the display to 70 and collecting button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the determined effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 5 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. Opaque effect button The image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "protruding button rainbow" is a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. The “protruding” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color without the first movable member 73 operating, which suggests that the jackpot game is not executed. Indicates that is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow colors, and the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that the jackpot game is executed. It shows that the decision success effect that suggests is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is determined and the successful effect starts (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed, in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow emission (11 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the effect button LED for emitting the effect button 17 is determined and the success effect is started (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (a period longer than that when the effect button 17 vibrates strongly).

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"protruding button red" <"protruding button rainbow". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each button state is "normal" <"protruding".

The first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that when the determination success effect is executed, the vibration effect of generating an effective period and vibrating the effect button 17 is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the effect button 17 vibrates over the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect generated during the fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the uplifting feeling of the player at the time of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the vibration of the effect button 17 is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the motion effect using the first movable member 73 is executed in the determination effect (determination success effect), the operation effect using the second movable member 74 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the motion effect using the first movable member 73 to be higher than that of the motion effect using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery production pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table contains the effect mode, the presence / absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect pattern. It is associated with each other, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each re-lottery effect pattern is described as a reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. It is an effect of moving and displaying the image on the 70 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the re-lottery effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or 3 seconds elapses.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, it is an effect of displaying a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "normal button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "normal button rainbow" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is not protruding. Shows.

The "promotion failure effect" in the column of the re-lottery effect mode is a non-promotion symbol that does not become an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even-numbered symbol → even-numbered symbol, odd-numbered symbol other than “7” → It indicates that the odd-numbered symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and the non-promotion sound effect is output.
The "promotion success effect" is a derivation display of a promotion symbol (for example, even symbol → odd symbol, odd symbol other than "7" → "7" symbol) which is an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect. It indicates that the promotion sound effect is output while being (temporarily stopped).

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect is executed.

"Rainbow emission (4 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the effect button LED for emitting the effect button 17 is displayed for 4 seconds (at the end of the valid period) when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (the effect button 17 is). It shows that it emits rainbow light over a period of time (longer than that of strong vibration).

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"normal button red" <"normal button rainbow".

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, the vibration effect of generating an effective period and vibrating the effect button 17 is executed. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the player has been promoted to a production symbol that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating the valid period.

(Final production pattern decision table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a final effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for a final effect.

As shown in FIG. 59, the final effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each final effect pattern, and the selected final effect pattern, for reference. The effect configuration (execution timing, effect content) of each final effect pattern is described.

"-" In the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the final effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the final effect is executed.
The "fixed sound" in the voice column indicates that a fixed sound indicating that the jackpot game is executed is output.
"Handle rainbow emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for emitting the firing handle 15 emits rainbow colors from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the effect symbol stops and displays). Shows that to do.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the fixed sound is output. Is shown.

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when the final effect is executed, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating an effective period is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the definite effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state (other than the special SP reach) is better. The point that the final effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is easier to execute (higher rate of execution) than when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state (special SP reach). When the variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the special SP reach), the final effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, or when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific gaming state. In addition, the final effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59)
Here, as the first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, a vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed by a dialogue advance notice effect accompanied by an effective period of the effect button 17. When the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed by the step-up notice effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, the jackpot expectation degree (vibration effect due to the pattern alignment (strong vibration 4)) The rate at which seconds) are executed, the rate at which vibration effects (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) are executed in the determined effect, etc.) are high. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1) is performed by the dialogue advance notice effect accompanied by the effect period of the effect button 17, as compared with the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed by the step-up advance notice effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. When the second or strong vibration (1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation (the rate at which the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) associated with the above-mentioned symbol alignment is executed, and the vibration effect (strong vibration) is determined later. The rate at which 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot advance notice effect includes the first vibration effect (step-up at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect) in which the vibration period is relatively short. Vibration production (1 second) during advance notice production, pseudo continuous production, development production, etc., and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful production) with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second at the time, final effect, etc., and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) ) And a variable effect with a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. There are points. Therefore, it is possible to raise the sense of expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even when the look-ahead vibration effect is included, the second effect is after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (executed) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to raise the sense of expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the third effect period (SP / SPSP reach) is after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable production with a certain production), the first production period is more vibrating than the third production period during the first vibration production (during dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, etc.). The point that the effect (1 second)) is easy to be executed (the ratio of being executed is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to raise the sense of expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot advance notice effect includes the first vibration effect having a short vibration period (during the dialogue advance notice effect and the step-up advance notice effect). , Vibration production (1 second) during pseudo-continuous production, development production, etc., and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, final production, etc.) with a longer vibration period than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period (normal reach effect). In the variable effect with SP / SPSP reach effect), the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the second effect period than in the first effect period. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the third effect period (SP / SPSP reach) is after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a certain effect, the third effect period is longer than the first effect period, and the second vibration effect (cut-in effect, successful decision effect, final effect, etc.) is longer than 1 second. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 17 in the normal state in the first effect period (pre-reach effect). It is mentioned that the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without excessively agitating the expectation of the player during the first production period.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that during the third effect period (during SP / SPSP reach effect), the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and a second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is performed. The rate of execution is higher than the rate of executing the second vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without excessively agitating the expectation of the player during the first production period.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (during the dialogue notice effect and step-up notice effect). , Vibration production (1 second) during pseudo-continuous production, development production, etc., and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, confirmed) with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during production, and a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) of continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed. In the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. ) Points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the first vibration effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect has a second vibration effect (effect period) longer than that of the first vibration effect (the second vibration effect). There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during cut-in production, successful decision production, and final production, and during production modes A to C (normal game state). In the variable effect of, the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (even number symbol) is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach effect by the first type effect symbol (odd number symbol other than "7"). ), The reach effect is more difficult to be executed by the third type effect symbol (“7” effect symbol) than the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (the rate of execution is low), and the second type effect symbol is executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the reach effect by the third type of effect symbol is executed than when the reach effect by the third type is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol that executes the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that in the jackpot variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach effect is not accompanied (display of the operation promotion image). Vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, final effect) without valid period (display of operation promotion image) during post-reach effect, rather than the number of executions of look-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, final effect) ) Is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation during the production after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) rather than a jackpot variable effect in which a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be executed more times in the big hit variation effect (development effect, pattern alignment, C symbol alignment, final effect) without a valid period during the post-reach effect. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that in the loss variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, C) without an effective period during the post-reach effect is achieved. The number of executions of the vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, final effect) without a valid period during the pre-reach effect tends to be larger than the number of executions of the pattern alignment and final effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by vibrating the effect without a valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) is performed in the variable effect, rather than the pre-reach advance notice effect. When the post-reach notice effect (cut-in effect) with high jackpot expectation is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is easier to be executed (execution rate is high), and the pre-reach advance notice effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more post-reach advance notice effects than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). There is a point that the expectation of a big hit is high when the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

It should be noted that the effect modes A to C (normal game state) vibrate with the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 in the post-reach advance notice effect than the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The jackpot expectation when the production is executed may be high. Even in this case, the playability can be different depending on the type of the production mode, and it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the production modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more vibrating than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed in the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect. The jackpot expectation is higher when the production is executed, and in the jackpot fluctuation production, the post-reach production (successful decision production) is performed regardless of whether the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed during the pre-reach production. In the later period), the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned or C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is a vibration effect (during a dialogue notice effect, a pseudo) accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 executed during the variable effect. One of the vibration effects such as continuous production, development production, cut-in production, etc.) is executed in any of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations. Vibration effect without valid period (display of operation promotion image) of effect button 17 executed during variable effect (one of vibration effects such as step-up notice effect, symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) Is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without an effective period, it is possible to prevent the production mode of the vibration effect from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is a vibration effect (speech notice effect) accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 in the pre-reach effect period in the jackpot fluctuation effect. When the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time) is executed and when the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is executed without the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17, then (vibration effect at the time). The ratio of vibration effect (vibration effect of 3 seconds or more at the time of successful decision effect, pattern alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) is different during the effect period after reach), and the vibration effect does not accompany the validity period of the effect button 17. (Vibration effect during step-up notice effect) is easier to execute (higher execution rate) in the normal game state (effect modes A to C) than in the specific game state (effect mode D to G). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is the type of jackpot effect symbol (even symbol, "7") in which the symbols are aligned (including C symbol alignment) when the jackpot variation effect is executed. It is possible to make the execution mode (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the jackpot notice effect different depending on the odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol), but with the execution of the successful decision effect and the final effect. When the vibration effect is executed, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol that aligns the symbols (including the C symbol alignment). Therefore, while raising the expectation for the big hit by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The nineteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that after performing a vibration effect (decision success effect, etc.) accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation promotion image) in the jackpot fluctuation effect, the effective period (effective period (display, etc.)). It is possible to execute a vibration effect (design alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) without the operation promotion image display), and the vibration effect (decision effect, etc.) with an effective period (operation promotion image display) is the operation of the effect button 17. While the timing to start vibration changes depending on the timing, the timing to start vibration is predetermined for the vibration effect (symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) without an effective period (display of operation promotion image). Will be. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not it is accompanied by a valid period (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the same movable member (second) is used in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Although it is possible to execute a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) using the movable member 74), the specific effect is performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point that the jackpot expectation when is executed is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that a plurality of jackpot expectations differ between the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is possible to execute stage effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to G (specific game state). If the stage effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) are the same stage (step-up notice effect, any of the 3rd step effect, 4th step effect, and 5th step effect, and if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, There is a difference in the degree of expectation of a big hit when it progresses to once or twice). Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that a plurality of jackpot expectations differ between the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Any of the operation promotion effects can be executed, and the operation effects (any of the development effect, the cut-in effect, and the determined effect) can be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normally) can be executed. The jackpot expectation when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed differs between the game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), and the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are different. ) And the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the effective suggestion effect is executed and the operation is promoted as compared with the case where the operation promotion effect is executed without the effective suggestion effect being executed when the operation effect is executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the production is executed can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the effective suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, 1 second) executed in association with the jackpot notice effect is the effect button 17. There are cases where it is executed with a valid period and cases where it is executed without a valid period, but the vibration effect that is executed with the jackpot notice effect is relatively long (3 seconds or more). Is executed with a valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect on the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59)
Here, as the first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state is more specific. In the game state, the operation effect (speech notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) that involves the operation of the effect button 17 is more than the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. The point that the decision effect and the re-lottery effect are easy to be executed (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the second variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. When the second special symbol variation display) is executed, the operation effect (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. The point that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high) can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variable effect (the variable effect of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the normal gaming state. In the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific game state, the operation of the effect button 17 is performed before the reach. It is difficult to execute the operation effect (line notice effect, roulette advance notice effect, etc.) accompanied by (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the normal gaming state. When the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific game state, the operation involving the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. There is a point that the number of executions of the production (line notice production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, roulette notice production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production) tends to be small (the rate of reduction is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific gaming state. In the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed, the operation effect accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 before the reach (reach effect) is performed. The point is that the look-ahead vibration effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the roulette advance notice effect, etc.) are easily executed (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific gaming state. When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed, the operation effect (line notice effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. , Pseudo-continuous production, development production, roulette notice production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production) are likely to be executed many times (the ratio of increase is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that, in the normal game state, the specific game is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed. In the state, when the first fluctuation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that becomes a loss is executed, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development). The point that it is difficult to execute (the ratio of execution is low) is that it is difficult to execute the production, the roulette notice production, the cut-in production, the decision production, the re-lottery production, etc. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is performed in the specific gaming state. When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette advance notice effect) that vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. , Cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) are easy to execute (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the normal gaming state. When the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific game state, the effect button 17 is vibrated before the reach. There is a point that it is difficult to execute the vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, roulette advance notice effect, etc.) to be executed (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the normal gaming state. In the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific game state, the operation involving the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. The point that the number of executions (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette advance notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) tends to be small (the rate of decrease is high) is mentioned. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific gaming state. When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit (reach effect is performed), is executed, the vibration effect (look-ahead) that vibrates the effect button 17 before the reach is performed. The point that vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, roulette advance notice effect, etc.) is easy to be executed (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit (the reach effect is performed), is executed in the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit (reach effect is performed), is executed, the operation effect (look-ahead vibration effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. , Dialogue notice production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, roulette notice production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.) are likely to be executed many times (the ratio of increase is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. The point that the number of types of noticeable effects that can be executed is larger when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (the former is a timer effect, a dialogue advance notice effect, a development effect, Roulette notice production, cut-in production, final production, the latter are various look-ahead production, timer production, dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, roulette notice production, cut-in production, decision production, Final production). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. When the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the advance notice effect whose execution timing is before the reach (various look-ahead effects, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) There is a point that the number of executions of is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the specific gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed rather than in the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the advance notice effect whose execution timing is before the reach (various look-ahead effects, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) There is a point that the number of executions of is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. When the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the specific effect (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-ream) accompanied by the operation of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed. It is easy to perform production, development production, decision production, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the specific gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed rather than in the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the specific effect (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-ream) accompanied by the operation of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed. It is easy to perform production, development production, decision production, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal game state, the specific game is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is executed. In the state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) resulting in the loss is executed, the operation effect (look-ahead operation) of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed. It is difficult to perform production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, decision production, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a loss, is performed in the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the operation effect of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, It is easy to carry out development production, decision production, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that, in the normal game state, the specific game is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed. In the state, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed, the operation effect of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed before the reach. It is difficult to execute the look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal game state, the specific game is more than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed. In the state, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a big hit, is executed, the operation effect (look-ahead operation effect) of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed. , Pseudo-continuous production, development production, decision production, etc.) are likely to be executed less frequently (the rate of reduction is higher). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the jackpot is higher than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a jackpot, is executed in the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the operation effect (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo) of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed before the reach. There is a point that it is easy to execute (continuous production, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that the jackpot is higher than the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol), which is a jackpot, is executed in the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the operation effect of the movable member (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, The point is that the number of executions (development production, decision production, etc.) tends to increase (the ratio of increase is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the specific game state in which the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is easily executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 24th feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) in which the reach effect is performed is executed in the specific gaming state, before the reach is performed. It is easier to execute the operation effect (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect) accompanied by the operation of the effect button 17 after the reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 25th feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) in which the reach effect is performed is executed in the specific gaming state, before the reach is performed. After reaching, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette advance notice effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) The point that it is easy to carry out is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 26th feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) in which the reach effect is performed is executed in the specific gaming state, before the reach is performed. It is pointed out that the motion effects (look-ahead motion effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, decision effect, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are more easily executed after the reach. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the control CPU 141a.

First, the integrated CPU 141a prohibits all interruptions in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial settings such as built-in register settings, access permission to the central RAM 141c, initialization of the entire RWM area of the central RAM 141c (0 clear), and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts. ), Etc., and in step T3, all interruptions are permitted.

The control CPU 141a performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) and display device (first image display device 70, second) of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71) and the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted, and the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5). ), The initial value of the light amount value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light amount value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)). Perform processing.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed if the gaming machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is started).

The control CPU 141a performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, it is output from the voice output device 9 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The control CPU 141a performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the display device (first image display) is based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is restricted (restricted) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a), and is restricted (restricted) for a predetermined period (for example, 0). .5 seconds) is allowed to elapse. Further, from the power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc. Important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unauthorized winning) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error (until the timer interruption is started on the main control board 110) , Abnormal prize, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are also regulated (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various production sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction.

The control CPU 141a performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process is transferred to step T9.

The control CPU 141a performs the animation pattern setting process in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of the type corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

The general CPU 141a performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

In step T11, is the control CPU 141a set with a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in the control RAM 141c? Judge whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag sets the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing / display of the production image for one frame is scheduled to be completed) is controlled by the control unit 141. Is set by the V blank interrupt process that is executed every time it is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The control CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the control RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the above-mentioned V blank interrupt processing are referred to, and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in the above step T9. , Performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The control CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer. The process of displaying on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) will be performed. That is, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable effect, jackpot notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. It is supposed to be the end timing.

It should be noted that the effect directly controlled by the effect control unit 130 m and the lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84, and the effect of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74). Regarding the operation), it may coincide with the frame update timing, or it may not coincide with the frame update timing.

The control CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI).

As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the player can operate it. Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook important points such as the start of the variable effect and the end of the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error, During the notification (output of the notification sound) of the door opening error), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 which can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 which can be operated by the player. Is now regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store side regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience that the player who is trying to adjust the volume and the light amount does not notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various production sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormal notification sound due to various production sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that during the notification of abnormality (output of the notification sound), the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, and the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be disabled. May be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Specific example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
A specific example of operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 19) while waiting for a customer will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the effective suggestion effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the valid period may occur is not executed when the state shifts to the customer waiting state in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed. The valid period while waiting for customers when the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is valid (since the valid period while waiting for customers is maintained until the variable effect is started, the valid period during the variable effect is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the variable effect. Can occur over a long period of time) is started.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) for guiding the game assist function started by the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is displayed at the lower right of the first image display device 70. Specifically, the volume can be adjusted by operating the first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and the up / down buttons of the cross key 19. The second image (the image that imitates the cross key 19 whose up and down buttons are bright colors) and the third image (the left and right buttons) that suggest that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19. An image that imitates the light-colored cross key 19) is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 61B, the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the effect symbol 70a without the effect button 17 vibrating, and the menu image MG is displayed. Display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, and a "effect customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a final effect). A "Pachilog" item for managing the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.) is set, and the currently selected item is displayed in light color, while the current non-selected item is displayed in dark color. It is designed to be displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating as shown in FIG. 61 (c). Further, the erasing sound of the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the volume value image OG showing the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19. At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 as shown in FIG. 61 (e). Will be updated. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the cross key 19 in this state, the volume value image OG is deleted and the guide image AG is displayed again as shown in FIG. 61 (f). ..

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the effect button 17 relating to various advance notice effects (speech advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) generated during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur for a period longer than the effect period, the effect button 17 vibrates (by vibrating the effect button 17). (Including the indirect vibration of the transmitted cross key 19) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. Will be.

In addition, regarding the validity period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment that occur during the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) and the big hit effect (big hit game), various advance notice effects (line) that occur during the variable effect are also given. It can occur for a longer period than the valid period related to the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc., but in the effective period of the cross key 19 related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment. Even if the cross key 19 is operated, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 19 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable effect or the jackpot effect, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that causes the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, for the valid period waiting for customers, the effective suggestion effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the effective period may occur before the effective period occurs is not executed. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 19 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the big hit effect (big hit game) is also an effective suggestion effect (introduction) before the effective period occurs. The production) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period (display period of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect. The validity period (operation) of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, rather than when the effect button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image), it is easier to execute the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the valid period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects generated during the variable effect is a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.). There is an effective period with the display of an image) and a relatively long second effective period (an effective period with the display of an operation promotion image related to a decision effect, etc.), but the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect. When the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the effect button 17 is operated more than when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting valid period which can occur over a longer period. It is easier to perform a vibration effect that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for customers, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 at a predetermined ratio may be executed, but even in this case, a variable effect may be executed. At a lower rate than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the process. It is good to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 63 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 64 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 62 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E and the second special figure hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TI are not displayed. ..

The timing of T1 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number and the non-animation increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is a notification sound when the icon is generated, is performed. The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is from "0" to "1". , And the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display unit 70B1. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the fluctuation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal fluctuation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first special symbol hold number by non-animation, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon by animation to the icon are displayed. It will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is from "1" to "0". , And the first hold icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparatory operation) is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The character image of the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a performs an action effect of moving the head, and scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The character image of the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a performs an action effect of moving the head, and scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is temporarily stopped. The character image of the stopped effect symbol 70a performs an action effect of moving the head, and the combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the effect is lost is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left middle right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special figures held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, one frame that minimizes the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon by non-animation. Since it ends in a minute period (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so that it will not be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is after the timing when the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends (frame update) (frame). (Update) Since it continues until the timing, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special figures held has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figure holdings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the holding number is reduced by non-animation and the holding icon is changed by animation to the icon. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special figure reservations has decreased due to the holding number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special figures held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same timing (frame update), the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example of an increase in the number of holds during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 66. FIG. 65 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the variable effect, and FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 65 (a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is the 50th frame after the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started. To.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1". , The first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in a very small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special figure reservations increases, the increase display by non-animation of the hold numbers and the increase display by animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the number of special figure reservations has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the fun of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special figure reservations changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special figure reservations has increased due to the holding number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figure reservations increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special figure reservations increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the hold number and the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold icon end in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special figure is held. It is possible to effectively produce the increase in the number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon (20 frames), the variable effect is started. It can be emphasized and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever? May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special figures reserved has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example of the case where the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 68. FIG. 67 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (f) are diagrams showing an example of an effect corresponding to FIGS. 67 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of “4”, “6”, and “8” indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first special symbol hold number by non-animation, the change display of the first hold icon by animation to the icon, and the first hold icon. Animation reduction display of is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68B, in the first image display device 70, the first special figure holding number displayed in the first special figure holding number display area 70E is changed from “2” to “1”. It changes to. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display (preparatory operation) is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the 1st special figure hold number is started, but since the change display and the decrease display of the 1st hold icon are being executed, the increase display and the icon of the 1st hold icon are being executed. The output of the generation notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are started (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon that has been waiting is started, and the output of the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TI, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special figure pending increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the (frame update) timing, the player indicates that the special figure hold number has increased even while the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special figures held increases during the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for ( (Restriction), and when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special figure hold It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed from normal). The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) shortly before the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special figures held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for, as in the case of the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. (Restriction) On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example of an increase in the number of holds during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70. FIG. 69 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 69 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "5" are temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The fluctuation display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect symbol 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production to develop into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the first image display device 70, in the effect symbol 70a of "75" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and in the central variable display area. The scrolling effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) is displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D), leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the 1st special figure hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the 1st hold icon and the icon generation at this timing The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the final production of the confrontation production (decision production to notify whether it is a big hit or not) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“555”) indicating that is a big hit.

In the normal gaming state, regardless of whether the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed or the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effect symbol is executed. In the SP / SPSP reach effect in which the 70a is a display mode of only the numbers in which the character image does not exist, even if the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the operation effect of the character image is not performed.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swayed state). become). Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Then, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas returns to the display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is made with the same combination "555" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special figure reservations increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figure hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special figure hold, and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special figure hold increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special figure hold increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it was done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special figures held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), while the increase display of the hold number is executed, the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). However, it is advisable to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special figure reservations increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the reservation number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example in which the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. 71 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases / decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 72 (a) to (f) and 73 (g) to (i) are FIGS. 71 (a). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, and the second hold icon (white icon) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TI is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is displayed at the upper right of the screen toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first special figure hold number by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated are started. The generation notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

In the specific game state, regardless of whether the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed or the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effect symbol is executed. Since the 70a is a display mode of only the numbers in which the character image does not exist, the operation effect of the character image is not performed even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped by any variation effect pattern.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific gaming state, and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of big hit games executed in the character "Big hit x 1" is displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is made with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the second hold number by non-animation, the change display of the second hold icon by animation to the icon, and the reduction of the second hold icon by animation. The display, the non-animated return display of the first hold icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F changes from “4” to “3”, and at the same time, The second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icon (white icon) H22 to H24, which has been set, starts moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display (preparatory operation) is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU urging the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. The second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located in the center of the adjacent display unit along with the icon TI, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed. Stop.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first special figure hold icon is waited for (restricted), while the increase display of the first special figure hold number is displayed. Since it starts, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased even while the specific effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the number of the first special figure hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is performed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the increase display of the 1st special figure hold number that was executed before that, you can recognize that the 1st special figure hold number has increased, and you can enjoy the game. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special figure is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of reserved first special figures increases more than once during the specific game state, the increase display of the hold number is executed, while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of reserved first special figures increases during the specific game state, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ) May be set (displayed) only for the first hold icon display area 70B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure holding number display area 70E and the second special figure holding number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71. It may be set (displayed) to, or it may be set (displayed) to a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of reserved special figures according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 74, an effect example in which the player changes the effect element during the first variation effect in the specific game state will be described.
Here, an example in which the probabilistic gaming state is set as the specific gaming state is shown, but the same is basically true in the case of the reduced working hours gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 in this state, the first special figure holding number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure holding number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first hold icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first hold icon is not displayed, and any generation notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9. There is no such thing.

When the first variation effect is started from this state with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "1". Although it changes to "0", the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon is not performed, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the current volume value "4". The BGM is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the above.

Further, in the specific game state, the left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, the left-handed error image HUE suggesting that the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than that of the right-handed image MU, and is an audio output device. A left-handed error voice of "Please hit right" is output from 9.

It should be noted that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls win a prize in the first start port 45 instead of notifying the left-handed error because one game ball wins in the first start port 45 in the specific game state. By doing so, left-handed error notification may be performed.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47, the second special figure hold number (U2) becomes "1", and the generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9 to hold the second special figure hold. The number display area 70F becomes "1". Further, the hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70B.

The left-handed error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is deleted before the left-handed error voice. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be deleted before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is shown. Is displayed and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 as shown in FIG. 74 (d). The updated BGM currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the stop display is performed after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74 (e), the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a loss of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol elapses, the first variation effect ends, and the second variation effect starts with the start of the next variation display of the second special symbol, FIG. 74 (f). As shown in, the first special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second hold icon (white) displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70D. Icon) H21 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the volume corresponding to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous first variation effect (the volume (changed)). The output of BGM in the production element) is continued.

Here, an example is shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation effect in the specific gaming state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The case is basically the same.

Further, even when the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation effect in the specific game state, the light amount value is not the volume value image OG but the light amount value is operated by the operation of the cross key 19. The image is displayed, and the same is basically the same except that the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease of the light amount value.

Further, in the case where the second variation effect is executed after the first variation effect in the specific gaming state and the effect button 17 is operated during the first variation effect to change the effect mode, the background The image is changed to the background image according to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the first variable effect, the background image or BGM may be changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Further, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the specific game state, even if the effect mode is changed, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display mode of the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Further, even when the second variation effect is executed after the first variation effect in the normal gaming state and the effect button 17 is operated during the first variation effect to change the effect mode. The background image is changed to the background image according to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the first variable effect, the background image or BGM may be changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Further, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal gaming state, when the effect mode is changed, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 74, the second operation to be executed next by the operation of various operation units (effect button 17, cross key 19) during the execution of the first variable effect in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the effect elements (volume value, light amount value, effect mode, etc.) used for the variable effect. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 during the specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the generation notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused by outputting only the generation notification sound even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound (white icon) is generated. If the winning sound) is not output and the special icon is displayed, the generation notification sound according to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is annoyed by the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

At the start of the first variation effect, the hold icon is not displayed in shift and the icon is not displayed. However, the hold icon may not be displayed in shift and the icon may be displayed. ..

(Example of production when the player changes the production element during the second variation production in the specific game state)
An example of an effect in which the player changes the effect element during the second variation effect in the specific game state will be described with reference to FIG. 75.
Here, an example in which the probabilistic gaming state is set as the specific gaming state is shown, but the same is basically true in the case of the reduced working hours gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 75A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure hold number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure hold number display area 70F becomes "1", and the second hold icon The hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the display area 70B. Since the white icon is displayed even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific game state, no generation notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9 (a special icon is displayed). If so, the occurrence notification sound according to the type of special icon is output).

When the second variation effect is started from this state with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F is changed from "1" to "1". It changes to "0", and the second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70D starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM is output from the voice output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first special figure holding number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure holding number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first hold icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first hold icon is not displayed, and any generation notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9. There is no such thing.

Further, in the specific game state, the left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, the left-handed error image HUE suggesting that the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than that of the right-handed image MU, and is an audio output device. A left-handed error voice of "Please hit right" is output from 9.

It should be noted that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls win a prize in the first start port 45 instead of notifying the left-handed error because one game ball wins in the first start port 45 in the specific game state. By doing so, left-handed error notification may be performed. Further, the left-handed error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is deleted before the left-handed error voice. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be deleted before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is shown. Is displayed and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 as shown in FIG. 75 (d). The updated BGM currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the stop display is performed after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a loss of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol elapses, the second variation effect ends, and the first variation effect starts with the start of the next variation display of the first special symbol, FIG. 75 (f). As shown in, the first special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the hold icon shift display (decrease display) is not performed, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced display (preparation operation). At the same time, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM output at the volume (effect element) corresponding to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous second variation effect is continued. ..

Here, an example is shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation effect in the specific gaming state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The case is basically the same.

Further, even when the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation effect in the specific game state, the light amount value is not the volume value image OG but the light amount value is operated by the operation of the cross key 19. The image is displayed, and the same is basically the same except that the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease of the light amount value.

Further, in the case where the first variation effect is executed after the second variation effect in the specific gaming state and the effect button 17 is operated during the second variation effect to change the effect mode, the background The image is changed to the background image according to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. However, the period during which the effect mode can be changed during the second variation effect (only during the pre-reach effect) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light intensity value can be changed (except at the start and stop of the fluctuation).

In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the second variable effect, the background image or BGM may be changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Further, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the specific game state, even if the effect mode is changed, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display mode of the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Further, even when the first variation effect is executed after the second variation effect in the normal gaming state and the effect button 17 is operated during the second variation effect to change the effect mode. The background image is changed to the background image according to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. However, the period during which the effect mode can be changed during the second variation effect (only during the pre-reach effect) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light intensity value can be changed (except at the start and stop of the fluctuation).

In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the second variable effect, the background image or BGM may be changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Further, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal gaming state, when the effect mode is changed, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 75, the first operation to be executed next by the operation of various operation units (effect button 17, cross key 19) during the execution of the second variation effect in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the effect elements (volume value, light amount value, effect mode, etc.) used for the variable effect. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 during the specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the generation notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused by outputting only the generation notification sound even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound (white icon) is generated. If the winning sound) is not output and the special icon is displayed, the generation notification sound according to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is annoyed by the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

At the start of the first variation effect, the hold icon is not displayed in shift and the icon is not displayed. However, the hold icon may not be displayed in shift and the icon may be displayed. ..

(Example of effect when pre-reading operation effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
An example of the effect when the look-ahead operation effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

First, as shown in FIG. 76A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “468” indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and three white icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the variation effect (corresponding to the prior variation) is started from this state, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from “3” to “2” and 3 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). One hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead operation effect over the three variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak operation that operates toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak operation sound effect. Will be done.

After that, when the hold icon (left end in the figure), which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead operation effect, changes to a blue icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (c). (Preparation operation) is completed, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the first effect of the look-ahead operation effect is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "365". ..

Further, when the next variation effect (corresponding to the advance variation) has elapsed after the stop time of the effect symbol has elapsed, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "2" as shown in FIG. 102 (e). Is changed to "1", and the two hold icon HIs start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead operation effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak operation that operates toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak operation sound effect. Will be done.

After that, when the hold icon, which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead operation effect, changes to a red icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (f). After the end, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second effect of the look-ahead operation effect ends. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect is continued.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635". ..

Further, when the stop time of the effect symbol elapses and the variation effect (corresponding to the variation) which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), the first special figure hold number display. The area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead operation effect is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead operation effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, performs a strong operation to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong operation sound effect. Will be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 77 (i), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a ends, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third effect of the look-ahead operation effect is completed.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a is started, the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 77 (j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 77 (k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is produced. Is output. Further, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second while the effect button 17 is turned off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output when the sound effect is generated, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continuing.

When 1 second elapses from that point, as shown in FIG. 77 (l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, after the number of holds displayed in the special figure hold number display area decreases with the start of the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a starts the preparatory operation). The look-ahead operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the effect symbol 70a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead motion effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the look-ahead operation effect is performed after the movement (shift) of the hold icon is started with the start of the variable effect and before the movement of the hold icon is completed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead motion effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the vibration effect is not executed during the first to fourth step effects of the step-up notice effect, but the vibration effect is performed during the fifth step effect, which has the highest expectation. It is designed to run. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the execution period (1) of the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect is larger than the execution period (3 seconds) of the fifth step effect of the step-up notice effect. Seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect is not superior to the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect does not involve the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17, so that the operation promotion image (display of the operation promotion image) is not accompanied. The sound effect when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when operating the effect button 17 during the valid period (operation sound effect, operation sound effect of movable member, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the effect light emission and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continued even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the effect emission and the lamp change effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Although the effect button 17 is not emitted in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (big hit confirmation) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the rainbow color, which is the emission color, may be emitted in a emission mode different from the emission mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is attracted attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). The effect light emission may be performed.

(Example of effect when pre-reading vibration effect and dialogue notice effect are executed)
An example of the effect when the look-ahead vibration effect and the dialogue advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79.

First, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and three white icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the variation effect (corresponding to the prior variation) is started from this state, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from “3” to “2” and 3 as shown in FIG. 78 (b). One hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead vibration effect over the three variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second, and the effect button 17 blinks white for 1 second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues.

After that, when the hold icon (left end in the figure), which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, changes to a blue icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (c). (Preparatory operation) is completed, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the first effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "365". ..

Further, when the next variation effect (corresponding to the advance variation) has elapsed after the stop time of the effect symbol has elapsed, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "2" as shown in FIG. 78 (e). Is changed to "1", and the two hold icon HIs start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second, and the effect button 17 blinks white for 1 second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continuing.

After that, when the hold icon, which is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, changes to a red icon immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (f). After the end, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 stop, and the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect ends. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect is continued.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 79 (g), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "635". ..

Further, when the stop time of the effect symbol elapses and the variation effect (corresponding to the variation) that is the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead vibration effect is started, as shown in FIG. 79 (h), the first special figure hold number display. The area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the reduced display (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 blinks red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continuing.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 79 (i), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect symbol 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the look-ahead vibration effect Strong notice will remain on. After that, the strong vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 stop, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect ends.

Then, when the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 79 (j), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 3 seconds) occurs and the dialogue advance notice effect starts. Will be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79 (k), the heat dialogue "What is this !? It's hot !!" is displayed in red letters. , The voice (directing sound) corresponding to the heat dialogue is output. Further, while the effect button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second. The lamp change production is continuing.

When 1 second elapses from that point, as shown in FIG. 79 (l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, and an SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. It will be executed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, after the number of holds displayed in the first special figure hold number display area decreases with the start of the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a is a preparatory operation). (After starting), and before starting the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation), the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, white blinking) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the look-ahead vibration effect is performed after the movement (shift) of the hold icon is started with the start of the variation effect and before the movement of the hold icon is completed. (Vibration of the effect button 17, blinking white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed while notifying the player that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is made to blink in white without the validity period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even when the effect button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 in the look-ahead vibration effect is a notice effect (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in) accompanied by the occurrence of an effective period. It is different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 during the valid period in the effect, determination effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the effect period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) is not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pre-reach advance notice effect makes it difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect that is difficult to judge by appearance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the pseudo-continuous production makes it difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect that is difficult to judge by appearance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue advance notice effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice effect. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect without the vibration effect being superior to the appearance of the dialogue advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the vibration effect executed during the look-ahead vibration effect does not involve the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 17, so that the operation promotion image (opaque). The display sound effect when displaying the effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, operation sound effect of movable member, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect) is involved. A display sound effect when displaying a button image (button image, gauge image) and an effect sound (operation sound effect, dialogue sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the effect light emission and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are continued even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. There is. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the effect emission and the lamp change effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color which is the emission color of the jackpot confirmation) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the above may be used to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is attracted attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). The effect light emission may be performed.

(Timer production and execution time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the timer effect of the variable effect pattern in which the timer effect may be executed and the execution time of the timer effect will be described.

As the event timer effect, the timer effect includes "pseudo-ream generation timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of pseudo-ream, "normal reach generation timer effect" that suggests the start of normal reach effect, and "SP reach" that suggests the start of SP reach effect. "Generation timer effect", "SPSP reach generation timer effect" suggesting the start of SPSP reach effect, "Full rotation reach generation timer effect" suggesting the start of full rotation reach effect, suggesting the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17. There is a "valid period generation timer effect" and a "big hit symbol stop timer effect" that suggests that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 80A, in the case of the fluctuation effect patterns 6, 14 and 19, there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous generation timer effect, the normal reach generation timer effect, and the SP reach generation timer effect are executed.

In this case, the pseudo-continuous generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach generation timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 80B, in the case of the fluctuation effect patterns 7, 15 and 20, four of the normal reach generation timer effect, the SP reach generation timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, and the valid period generation timer effect are executed. There is a possibility.

In this case, the normal reach generation timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 80 (c), in the case of the fluctuation effect patterns 11 and 22, four of the pseudo continuous generation timer effect, the normal reach generation timer effect, the SPSP reach generation timer effect, and the valid period generation timer effect can be executed. There is sex.

In this case, the pseudo-continuous generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach generation timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach generation timer effect starts between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, an effect example in which two timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described. Here, it is assumed that the execution of the variation effect pattern 22, the pseudo-continuous generation timer effect (normal pattern 7), and the valid period generation timer effect (normal pattern 21) is determined in the normal game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is executed (timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols temporarily stops. When the reach state is formed, the normal reach effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds left", the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a pseudo-continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. , The pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect associated with the pseudo-continuous production is omitted in the figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), "x3" indicating the number of pseudo-variations (the stage of the effect has progressed) due to the re-variation of the effect symbol 70a is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), the SPSP development symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong motion effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits light in blue and operates. Will be done. At this time, when the effect of the timer for generating the valid period is started, the white character timer YTW of "35 seconds left", which is a normal display, is displayed on the image display device 70, and the subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen is whitened out and the development effect is completed. As shown in FIG. 81 (e), the effect symbol 70a in the middle region is re-variated, and the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen. SPSP reach production is started. With the start of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon and the icon are hidden. At this time, the white character timer YTW is "33 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, when the SPSP reach effect approaches the final stage, as shown in FIG. 81 (f), an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the determined effect starts. Will be done. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white character timer YTW is "2 seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, after the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white character timer YTW becomes "0 seconds left", as shown in FIG. 81 (g), the valid period of the effect button 17 (single stroke). Operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image that imitates an effect button 17 that emits red light in a protruding state at a specific position in the center of the screen after 5 seconds) and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period. Is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 81 (h), the determined success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after vibrating the effect button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is started, and at the upper left of the screen. Temporarily stop with three production symbols 70a of "7" aligned. Further, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(Example of production when roulette notice production is performed before reach production and pseudo-continuous production is executed)
An example of an effect in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

First, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), an SPSP development symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect, an SP development symbol suggesting the development to the SP reach effect, a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-reach effect, and a jackpot. A roulette notice effect is executed in which multiple options such as a chance symbol that suggests that the winning expectation is higher than the dregs symbol are rotated and displayed in a variable manner like a roulette wheel. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), it is notified that the pseudo symbol among the plurality of types of options is stopped and the pseudo continuous effect is executed.

After that, when the roulette notice effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area and the success sound effect is output (the blue effect accompanying the pseudo continuous effect is omitted in the figure). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, and at the same time, a weak operation is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates. "X2" indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of the production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 82 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. The 70a is temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continued in the middle region, and a pseudo fanning effect is executed in the middle region to encourage whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. At this time, the valid period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promotion image SG composed of the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and the gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed and operated. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 82 (f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a pseudo-continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. (The red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo-continuous production is omitted in the figure). Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

When 1 second has elapsed from that point, as shown in FIG. 82 (g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 is stopped and the weak vibration effect is completed. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, and a strong motion is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates and the number of pseudo variations (the stage of the effect progresses). “× 3” indicating (what you have done) is displayed in red.

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the pseudo-ream success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the effect symbol 70a of "5" in the left area and the right area. Is temporarily stopped and the normal reach effect is executed, and after that, the SP reach effect corresponding to the SP development symbol that did not stop at the roulette after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the normal reach effect is executed. The SPSP reach effect corresponding to the SPSP development symbol that did not stop at the roulette after being executed will be executed.

(Example of production when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
An example of an effect in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

First, as shown in FIG. 83A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. In the middle region, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo-continuous success effect is started without the valid period of the effect button 17 occurring. Specifically, in the middle region, a fanning effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

After that, when the fanning effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region and a success sound effect is output (the blue flame effect accompanying the pseudo continuous effect is omitted in the figure). ). Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, and at the same time, a weak operation is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates. "X2" indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of the production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (e), when the pseudo-ream effect is started, the pseudo-ream effect is executed to encourage whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped in the middle region. At this time, an effect period of the effect button 17 is generated, and an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period is displayed. The button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a pseudo-ream success effect, and a success sound effect is output (as shown in FIG. 83 (f)). The red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo-continuous production is omitted in the figure). Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

When 1 second has elapsed from that point, as shown in FIG. 83 (g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 is stopped and the weak vibration effect is completed. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, and a strong motion is performed to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a re-variates and the number of pseudo variations (the stage of the effect progresses). “× 3” indicating (what you have done) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 83 (h), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, the normal reach effect is executed, and then, according to the variable effect pattern. The SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, it is possible to execute the vibration effect at the time of executing the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-ream success effect is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-ream success effect. It's getting shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-successful production without the vibration effect being superior to the appearance of the pseudo-successful production. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect) is involved. A display sound effect when displaying a button image (button image, gauge image) and an effect sound (operation sound effect, success sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-continuous production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the reach effect, the type of the effect symbol that forms the reach state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is the pseudo-continuous effect. Downgraded from the type of production symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach by odd symbol to reach by even symbol, reach from reach by "7" symbol to reach by even symbol or odd symbol other than "7" It is not supposed to be downgraded to). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and the interest of the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the light emission of the effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color which is the emission color of the jackpot confirmed) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the above may be used to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo continuous effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo-continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effect period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo-continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
An example of the effect when the development effect is executed and the SP reach effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

First, as shown in FIG. 84A, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), it is notified that the SP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a result of the roulette notice effect and develops into the SP reach effect.

After that, the screen is whitened out and the development effect is completed. As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the effect symbol 70a in the middle area is re-variated, and the effect symbols 70a in the left area and the right area are left and right at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect is started. The icon is hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
An example of the effect when the development effect is executed and the SPSP reach effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

First, as shown in FIG. 85A, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 85B, an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective is started during the normal reach effect. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect of gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen is performed.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position at the lower right of the screen, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the valid period (long press 4 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs, and the specific position at the lower right of the screen occurs. An operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. , The effect button 17 emits red light. In addition, the character of "long press" is displayed in the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the effect button 17 is pressed and held for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses, the SPSP development symbol is provisionally displayed in the middle region as shown in FIG. 85 (d). At the same time as stopping, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong motion effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits light in blue and operates. Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

When one second elapses from that, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen is whitened out and the development effect is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (e), the effect symbol 70a in the middle region is re-variated, and the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen. SPSP reach production is started. With the start of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon and the icon are hidden.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, depending on the type of special effect symbols (special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped and special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are variablely displayed in the roulette effect. , It suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with high jackpot expectations (big hit expectations). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of special effect symbol that is variablely displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the player's expectation for developing into a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit can be obtained by executing an effective suggestion production in the development production. It can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the development effect without the vibration effect being superior to the appearance of the development effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the vibration effect executed at the time of the development effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect button) is involved. A display sound effect when displaying an image (image, gauge image) and an effect sound (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the development effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the light emission of the effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (other than the rainbow color which is the emission color for which the jackpot is confirmed) over the execution period of the vibration effect. The color may be emitted in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing It may be executed until (after 0.5 seconds) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated during the development effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the vibration effect is performed without generating the effect period of the effect button 17 during the development effect. May be executed, or the vibration effect may not be executed although the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated.

Further, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the effective suggestion effect can be executed at the time of the development effect, while the second variation effect is executed. When the variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestion effect is not executed at the time of the development effect, or it is harder to execute than the first variation effect (the rate of execution is low). If the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the effective suggestion effect can be executed at the time of the development effect, while the second variation effect can be executed. When 1 variation effect (variation display of the 1st special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestion effect is not executed at the time of development effect, or it is harder to execute than the 2nd variation effect (the rate of execution is low). May be good.

(Example of production when cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and it becomes a big hit)
An example of an effect in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect in the variable effect pattern 13 to become a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

First, as shown in FIG. 86A, the effect symbols 70a in the left region and the right region are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP reach effect is executed. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the SP reach effect approaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. It will be started. Specifically, two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the lower left and right sides of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. The operation promotion image SG composed of the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and the gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 86 (d). Specifically, the cut-in image of the red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the third cut-in sound effect is output. Further, the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds to start a weak vibration effect, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues. is doing.

After that, when 1 second has elapsed from the end of the output of the third cut-in sound effect, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect are ended, and as shown in FIG. 86 (e), the effect of "5" is produced in the middle region. Whether the symbol 70a is stopped or the effect symbol 70a of "6" is stopped is performed.

When a predetermined time elapses from that time, as shown in FIG. 86 (f), the effect buttons 17 are temporarily stopped in a state where three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment), and the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. Along with the start of the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) to vibrate, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow-colored light emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 continues. Further, when one second has elapsed from that point, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, in a state where three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment), they are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 3 seconds) occurs. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG. Is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 87 (i). Specifically, the reduced display of "5" effect symbols 70a is moved to the front side of the screen in a state where three are aligned (symbol alignment) and enlarged and displayed, and a non-promotion sound effect is output, but a plurality. The sound effect (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decorative LED is continuing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (j), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure effect ends. After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 87 (k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to shield the three effect symbols 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 87 (l), the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops. If there is a hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed. It emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from that point, as shown in FIG. 87 (m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "555" and is special. The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 87 (n), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are started, and the valid period of the effect button 17 is set. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated strongly for 1 second is started without accompanying, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, the opening effect of the jackpot game is completed, and the round game is started.

In the case of a variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the eye-catching effect is executed by shifting to FIG. 87 (k) after FIG. 87 (g).

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, so that the effective period is generated and the big hit expectation is high. It is possible to suggest this to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in effect and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect are the same. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the cut-in effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation promotion image (opaque effect) is involved. A display sound effect when displaying a button image (button image, gauge image) and an effect sound (operation sound effect, cut-in sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, vibration during the cut-in effect when the effect symbols 70a in the display mode not including the character are temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment). Since the strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) is executed for a longer period than the effect, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the big hit has occurred, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation) is performed when three effect symbols 70a in a display mode including a character are temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (C symbol alignment). Vibration production) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to reconfirm that the game has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect, big hit confirmation) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect symbols 70a aligned or at the opening of the big hit game. Since the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) does not involve the validity period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the display sound effect and the valid period when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image). The effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effects, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the SP reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained, the vibration effect is executed while the effect symbol 70a, which is the big hit, is temporarily stopped. The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game without making a mistake that the fluctuation effect is still continuing due to the vibration effect.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the light emission of the effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the effect button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color which is the emission color of the jackpot confirmed) over the execution period of the vibration effect. A color other than the above may be used to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode during the valid period of the effect button 17, such as blinking white or blinking yellow.

Further, although the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are set to continue the effect emission during the occurrence of the effect period related to the cut-in effect, whether the effect button 17 is operated immediately before the occurrence of the effect period or from the start of the effect period is the effective time. It is also possible to turn off a part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs until the lapse of time, and then restart the effect emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first and then a plurality of. The rainbow emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after executing the effect of returning the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect symbol 70a to the display mode included in the character. However, if the result of the SP reach effect is a loss, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after performing an eye-catching effect or an effect of returning the display mode of the effect symbol 70a to the display mode included by the character. In the case of a big hit, the effect symbol 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the effect of returning the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect symbol 70a to the display mode included by the character. ..

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (2 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the cut-in effect or the promotion success effect, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the cut-in effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the promotion success effect. The reverse may be made, or the vibration effect may not be executed during the cut-in effect and the promotion success effect.

Further, the vibration effect is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers or at the time of temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a including the character, but the effect symbol 70a of only numbers is used. While the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a including the character, or vice versa, or only the numbers. The vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a including the character.

Further, when the lamp change effect is executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (the winning opening lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon even during the cut-in effect). Although it emits light in color), it may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and a big hit is obtained)
An effect example 1 in which a determined effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect in the variable effect pattern 20 to become a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 88A, the three effect symbols 70a form a reach state and are reduced and displayed in the upper left portion of the screen to execute the SPSP reach effect. At this time, since the customer is not in the waiting state, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) is performed by the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5.

When the SPSP reach effect approaches the final phase from this state, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), an effective suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the decision effect. It will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 5 seconds) occurs, and the effect state protrudes to the specific position in the center of the screen. The operation promotion image SG composed of the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and the gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the determined success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after vibrating the effect button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is started, and at the upper left of the screen. Temporarily stop with three production symbols 70a of "5" aligned. Further, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful determination effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 88 (e), the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed in rainbow colors. A blessing production to celebrate the big hit is started while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (f), the effect symbols 70a of "5" are temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment), and the effect button 17 is vibrated strongly for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect). The jackpot fixed vibration effect) is started, and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output.

When 4 seconds have passed from that point, the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow-colored light emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 continues. Further, when one second has elapsed from that point, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, in a state where three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment), they are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single stroke 3 seconds) occurs. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating an effect button 17 that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG. Is output and the effect button emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the promotion success effect is started as shown in FIG. 89 (h). Specifically, the reduced display of the "5" effect symbol 70a has been switched to the "7" effect symbol 70a, which is moved to the front side of the screen in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment) and is enlarged and displayed. , Promotion sound effect is output. In addition, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (i), when the strong vibration effect is completed and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at a normal size, a plurality of game boards are used. The decorative LED restarts the effect emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow emission), and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 89 (j), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to shield the three effect symbols 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 89 (k), the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops, and the icon reappears. At the same time, if there is a first special figure hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed. It emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from that point, as shown in FIG. 89 (l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "777" and is special. The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 89 (m), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are started, and the valid period of the effect button 17 is set. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated strongly for 1 second is started without accompanying, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are completed, the opening effect of the jackpot game is completed, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and a big hit is obtained)
With reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, an effect example 2 in which a determined effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect in the variable effect pattern 16 to become a big hit will be described. Since FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c) are the same as those of FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c), the description thereof is omitted here.

When the effect button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 90 (c) or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), three effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned (symbol alignment). The effect of temporarily stopping is performed at, and the effect symbol 70a notifies that it is a big hit, but at this point, the strong vibration effect is not performed. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the determination success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after vibrating the effect button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is started, and at the upper left of the screen. Temporarily stop with three production symbols 70a of "5" aligned. Further, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful determination effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 90 (f), the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed in rainbow colors. A blessing production to celebrate the big hit is started while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to shield the three effect symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops, and the icon is re-established. At the same time, if there is a first special figure hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed. It emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from that point, as shown in FIG. 91 (i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "555" and is special. The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 91 (j), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are started, and the valid period of the effect button 17 is set. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect button 17 are operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) is not output. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are terminated, the opening effect of the jackpot game is completed, and the round game is started.

If the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period related to the determined effect, or if the determined failed effect is executed after the valid period has elapsed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. 1 The failure effect image is displayed on the image display device 70, and the failure sound effect is output. Further, a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs are turned off, and then the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach loss result (for example, "565"). After that, when a predetermined period elapses, an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a returns to the display mode including the character and temporarily stops. Then, the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special figure hold number, the hold icon is redisplayed. When one second has passed from that point, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped with a reach loss, and the special symbol TZ is also stopped with a reach loss.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the determined effect, so that the effective period is generated and the big hit expectation is high. Can be suggested to the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. By having a decision success effect, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the decision effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the first movable member 73 operates before the symbol alignment, and the first movable member 73 operates after the symbol alignment. The period from the operation of the effect button 17 to the execution of the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is different from the decision success effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling from the beginning, or to give the player an uplifting feeling after arousing the anxiety of the player, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game by the contrasting effect. ..

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the determined success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed during the determined success effect. Are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the successful decision production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is a big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the vibration effect (determination success vibration effect) executed at the time of the determination effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation is performed. Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) Is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration) is produced when three effect symbols 70a in a display mode that do not include a character are temporarily stopped (symbol alignment). Since the production) is performed, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the jackpot has been achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration) is produced when three effect symbols 70a in a display mode including a character are temporarily stopped (C symbol alignment). Direction) is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reconfirm that the game has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect symbols 70a aligned or at the opening of the jackpot game is the effect button. Since it does not involve the valid period of 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful determination effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the plurality of game board decorative LEDs were set to continue the effect emission during the occurrence of the effect period related to the determined effect, whether the effect button 17 is operated immediately before the occurrence of the effect period or from the start of the effect period is the effective time. In the meantime, when some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are turned off and the success effect is determined by the operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are rainbow-shaped. It may be made to emit light. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, at the time of the successful decision production, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are set to emit rainbow light, but the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 emit rainbow light, while a plurality of. A part or all of the game board decoration LED may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You may.

Further, when the decision success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs, and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first. The rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started after the start, or the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 may be started first and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started. You may.

In addition, after the blessing effect was completed, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumed the effect emission, and the effect button 17 was turned off. However, even after the blessing effect was completed, the rainbow emission of the game board decoration LED continued. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow light emission may be resumed until the production symbol 70a is stopped. May be continued.

Further, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first and then a plurality of. The rainbow emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after executing the effect of returning the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect symbol 70a to the display mode included in the character. However, if the result of the SPSP reach effect is a loss, the effect symbol 70a is stopped after performing an eye-catching effect or an effect of returning the display mode of the effect symbol 70a to the display mode included by the character. In the case of a big hit, the effect symbol 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the effect of returning the display mode of the eye-catching effect or the effect symbol 70a to the display mode included by the character. ..

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful determination effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of the presence / absence of the operation of the effect button 17 and the operation timing during the effective period. It may be executed until (3 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the successful decision effect or the successful promotion effect, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the successful decision effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful promotion effect. The reverse may be made, or the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful decision effect and the successful promotion effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a of only the numbers after the blessing effect, or at the time of the temporary stop of the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a including the character after the eye catch effect. However, while the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the number-only effect symbol 70a after the blessing effect, the vibration effect is executed when the jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect symbol 70a including the character after the eye-catching effect. It may not be done, or vice versa, and the big hit result by the effect symbol 70a including the character after the temporary stop and the eye-catching effect by the effect symbol 70a of only the numbers after the blessing effect. It is also possible not to execute the vibration effect at the time of temporary stop of.

Further, when the lamp change effect is executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the decision effect, the icon of the icon before the winning opening lamp NR is hidden). It emits light in a color corresponding to the display mode), but it may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs.

(Example of production when a special SP reach production is executed in the production mode A (normal game state) and a big hit is obtained)
An example of an effect in which a special SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state) to become a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

First, as shown in FIG. 92A, in the image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "635" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. At this time, since the effect mode A (normal game state) is set, the second hold icon display area 70D is hidden.

When the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, the second special figure reserved number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 92 (b). Change. Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), a development effect suggesting that the special SP reach effect is developed is executed, and the special SP reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also stopped at "555", so that the second variation occurs. The production ends.

After the end of the second variable effect, as shown in FIG. 92 (e), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot effect 1 is executed. When the second big hit game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the big hit effect 2 is executed.

(Example of production when a special SP reach production is executed in the production mode G (specific game state) and a big hit is obtained)
An example of an effect in which a special SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode G (specific game state) to become a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

First, as shown in FIG. 93A, in the image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E. At this time, since the effect mode G (specific game state) is set, the first hold icon display area 70B is hidden.

When the first variation effect is started from this state, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E changes from “2” to “1” as shown in FIG. 93 (b). Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), a development effect suggesting that the special SP reach effect is developed is executed, and the special SP reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also stopped at "555", so that the first variation occurs. The production ends.

After the end of the first variable effect, as shown in FIG. 93 (e), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot effect 1 is executed. When the second big hit game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the big hit effect 2 is executed.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and the second variation effect (second variation display) is performed in the specific gaming state. Different modes (whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is performed, whether or not the icon is displayed, and the type of background image) are different from the case where the special symbol variation display is executed. , BGM type, etc.), but the jackpot effect after the first variable effect in the specific gaming state and the jackpot effect after the second variable effect in the specific gaming state have a common mode (background image, BGM). , Round effect image, etc.) makes it possible to execute the effect. Therefore, during the jackpot production, it is not necessary for the player to be aware of whether the first fluctuation production is the trigger or the second fluctuation production is the trigger, so that the jackpot production can be enjoyed without bringing in extra thoughts. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal gaming state, the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. It is possible to execute the effect by (whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is displayed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the normal game state. The jackpot effect after the first variation effect and the jackpot effect after the second variation effect in the normal gaming state may be able to execute the effect in a common manner (background image, BGM, round effect image, etc.). By doing so, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable effect is the trigger or the second variable effect is the trigger during the jackpot production, so that the player can enjoy the jackpot production without bringing in extra thoughts. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when probabilistic mission production is executed during a big hit)
With reference to FIG. 94, an example of an effect in which a probabilistic mission effect of whether or not a probabilistic game state is reached during a big hit (round game) is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 17 (opening vibration effect). ) Is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when 1 second elapses, the strong vibration effect ends, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), an explanation of the probabilistic mission effect as to whether or not the probabilistic game state is reached. Is started, and the characters "Defeat the enemy is a definite change" are displayed until the end of the second round game.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the valid period (single hit for 5 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs as shown in FIG. 94 (c). The probabilistic mission production is started. Specifically, the characters "Destroy" are displayed, and an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed. , The display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decorative LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 94 (d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state where the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 94 (e), the characters "defeat" indicating that the mission was successful are displayed, the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is completed, and a plurality of game boards are displayed. The effect emission of the decorative LED is resumed, and when the third round game is completed, the characters "defeat" are erased and the round effect is resumed.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. 94 (f), the valid period of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 (here, the tenth round game from the start of the ninth round game). A mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode in the probabilistic game state is started after a lapse of at least 11 seconds from the start to the elapse of 5 seconds). Specifically, the selection image of the production mode D and the selection image of the production mode E are displayed, and the characters "Please select the mode during the probability change with the cross key and confirm with the button!" As the operation promotion image, white. An opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits light is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 94 (g), the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the option image of the effect mode E is displayed in dark color). The option image of the effect mode E is selected (the option image of the effect mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 94 (h), the option image of the effect mode E is enlarged and displayed, and the first effect mode in the probabilistic game state is the effect mode. It is notified that it becomes E, and the mode selection effect ends. After that, when the tenth round game is completed, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect is completed, the probabilistic game state is started.

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the failure sound effect is output. .. Further, the mode selection effect is not executed and the process shifts to the ending effect.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 94, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success effect and the execution period of the vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) executed during the mission success effect. (5 seconds) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the mission success effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is an advantageous result for the player, that is, that a probable change state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 94, since the vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) executed at the time of the mission success effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image). ) Is displayed, and the effect sound (success effect sound) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 94, the execution period of the vibration effect (promotional vibration effect) executed at the time of the mission success effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 94, the vibration effect is not executed even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated during the mode selection effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player misunderstands that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected production mode than in the non-selected production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

It should be noted that, while the valid period related to the probabilistic mission effect is being generated, a plurality of game board decorative LEDs are designed to continue the effect light emission, but whether the effect button 17 is operated immediately before the effective period is generated or from the start of the effective period is the effective time. When some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are turned off and the mission success effect is executed by the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. You may make it emit a rainbow light. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, at the time of the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are set to emit rainbow light, but while the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 emit rainbow light, a plurality of. A part or all of the game board decoration LED may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while a part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You may.

Further, when the mission success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decorative LEDs, and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first. The rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started after the start, or the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 may be started first and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decorative LEDs may be started. You may.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the mission success effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 17 is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (3 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the mission success effect, the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the mission success effect.

(Example of effect when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
An example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, "728". It is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display are started. The first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red icon, so that the icon change effect is started, and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off and blinks red. By changing to the state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased together with the hold icon.

After that, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 95 (e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C on which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning opening lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect on the winning opening lamp NR remains continuous.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 95 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 96 (g), the initial screen including the characters "reading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. Maintain the state.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the character "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 96 (h). The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to a higher value jackpot effect symbol for the player). However, even here, the winning opening lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 96 (i), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a ( The effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped display (still display) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , The variation effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but is rectangular. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (j), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 96 (k), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a ( The "777" jackpot production symbol 70a (which formed the reach state before the power was cut off) suggesting the type of the jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing the swing fluctuation / swing display). 3 ↓ 3 ”is a combination of production symbols that is different from the reach combination by the production symbol), and the stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped display (still display) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is displayed by the winning opening lamp NR. The variable production ends without restarting.

It should be noted that not only the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, but also other variable effects (variable effect in which normal variation is executed, variable effect in which shortened variation is executed, variable effect in which normal reach effect is executed, SP reach effect). As for the variable effect), when the power supply stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation / rocking display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753 ”missing effect symbol 70a, or the jackpot effect symbol that is the same combination of effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbol that formed the reach state before the power was turned off, or a combination of different effect symbols is stopped display (still display). Will be done.

Further, regarding the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) with a number having the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (l), the image display device is provided with information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that the jackpot game is the first jackpot game). The including opening effect is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (it does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit) (for example, white lighting). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then displayed as a stop is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command (when the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state shifts to the customer waiting state after that, when the special symbol change time elapses, the customer waits When the state designation command) is received, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a stop (stationary display) without temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a (sway fluctuation / swing display). Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss fluctuation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the combination of the effect symbols, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display) instead of the normal loss effect symbol. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as determining the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (still display) by lottery, the power is restored to restore the control state of the game, and the power supply is executed when the power supply is stopped. It becomes possible to grasp that the variable production that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In that case, the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power restoration is such that the control state of the game is restored, and that the variation effect that was executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variation effect.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the control state of the game is restored, a reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that were used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbol that was scheduled to be stopped before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the variable effect executed at the time when the power supply is stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display), the player immediately knows that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to grasp.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the game is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the restart of power supply is the same as in the case where the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without being conscious of whether the loss fluctuation effect is being executed or the jackpot variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. Can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, the stop display (still display) is performed with a number having the same combination as the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step. Until the variation effect (scrolling of the effect symbol 70a) is started, the icon display area 70C displays a rectangular area image, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the power supply stopped while the hold icon is displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step. By displaying a rectangular area image in the hold icon display area until the variable effect of is started, the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed. It is secured and the hold icon is displayed. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the reserved fluctuation effect has not disappeared, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) If the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is a big hit without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (turns off or lights up in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, while reducing the control load after restarting the power supply, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as restarting the lamp change effect even though the variation effect is not executed.

After the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but as in the case of loss, when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect symbol 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. May be started for the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of the jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, the jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, which are the initial symbols at the time of power restoration, are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot is displayed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a specific effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot game is executed without displaying the effect symbol 70a in the reach state in the variable effect (to expect the jackpot game to be executed), the specification is specified. After the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if there is a loss, the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display), and if it is a big hit. The jackpot effect symbol 70a may be stopped and displayed (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, it is one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the types of jackpot games executed thereafter. May be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and "222". It is assumed that "444", "666", and "888", and the combinations of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game are "111", "555", and "999".

When the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1 ↓ 1" which constitutes a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game executed after that is the first. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols different from the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of the same or different jackpot effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state). It is advisable to stop and display.

Further, the special symbol TZ does not stop and display (still display) with a number that is the same combination as the effect symbol 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, but the combination is different from the effect symbol 70a. It may be set to stop display (still display) with a number.

In addition, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display), while the power supply is turned on. If the specific game state (low-accuracy time-short game state, high-accuracy time-short game state) and the customer waiting state after restarting and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a is not stopped and displayed (still display). The special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (still display).

(Example of effect when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during execution of look-ahead effect effect, hold icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
97 and 98 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 97A, the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. At that time, it is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variation effect that becomes a preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and The first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the first hold icon (shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2) ( The display mode of the icon final display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon to start the hold icon change effect, and the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to the blue flashing state accordingly. The change production is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 97 (d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect that becomes a preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 are displayed. The displayed first hold icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the hold icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 97 (g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 97 (h), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is a lamp. Keep the lights off without restarting the change effect.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the character "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 98 (i). The returning screen including the above is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the winning opening lamp NR remains off again.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-variation ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 98 (j), the temporary stop display (sway variation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed. Without performing, the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped display (still display) are displayed, and the lamp change effect is not restarted in advance. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, a white icon other than the blue icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying the square area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 98 (k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 displays the variable display. 1 The hold icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if the newly executed lottery for the icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue icon according to the result, so that the icon changes. The production starts. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the winning opening lamp NR remains off and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (l), the dialogue issued by the ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and the voice "Chance has arrived!" Corresponding to the dialogue from the voice output device 9. Is displayed to execute the dialogue notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (m), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 98 (n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 98 (o), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 98 (p), this big hit game (here, the first). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333", which suggests the type of (1 jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (it does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit) (for example, white lighting). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special symbol stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation effect (temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a), the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation) does not stop and display. , The temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) will be continued.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration is stored. The continuous advance notice effect is not restarted in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the production proceeds without knowing the advance notice target of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply stopped during the execution of other continuous advance notice effects is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the icon is displayed as a special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed). When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold icon that was displayed as a special icon is now displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variable effect corresponding to, the hold icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the icon change effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, even when the icon change effect is executed again while the variation effect corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is being executed. It is no longer executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot is not restarted without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (turned off or turned on in white) that does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. Therefore, while reducing the control load after restarting the power supply, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as restarting the lamp change effect even though the variation effect is not executed.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the effect lever device 23 is provided in addition to the effect button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. The description of the same part as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, a production lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on a portion of the upper plate 11 on the central bottom surface side so as to form the front and back of the effect button device 16.
The effect lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom surface side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back sides of the effect button device 16, and the effect lever 24 and the effect lever 24 can be pulled toward the front side by the player. An effect lever detection switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the effect lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24 are provided, and the player can operate the effect lever 24 to allow the player to play the game machine. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

Since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration of the effect button device 16 serves as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the effect lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one of the operation units, the vibration effect that vibrates the other operation unit (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut). When the vibration effect with / without the valid period of the operation unit related to the in-effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, final effect, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation unit. It is supposed to be done.

Further, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration serves as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the launch handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 that fulfill the above. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the determined effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 100, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the selected determined effect pattern are associated with the determined effect pattern determination table. As a reference, the effect composition (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 or a half imitating the effect lever 24. The transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button image and the semi-transparent effect lever image are collected toward a specific position.
The "valid period (single stroke 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the determined effect ends when one operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 or 5 seconds elapses.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) for which the operation is valid during the valid period, and if it is the "effect button", the effect button 17 is used. The operation is effective, and if it is a "effect lever", the operation of the effect lever 24 is effective.
The "promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the valid period. Specifically, the effective suggestion effect is not executed or the effective suggestion effect is executed. As a result, the opaque effect button image or the opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and the gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is not protruding and emits white light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button. It is shown that 17 emits white light.
The "protruding button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
The "protruding button rainbow" is a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "normal lever" indicates that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect lever image, an effect lever image imitating a predetermined size effect lever 24 is displayed.
The "large lever rainbow" indicates that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect lever image, an effect lever image imitating an effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed.

The "operation unit state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the valid period, and the "normal" means that the target operation unit is the effect button 17. If there is, it is a normal state in which it does not protrude, and "protruding" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in a protruding state. Since the effect lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color without the first movable member 73 operating, which suggests that the jackpot game is not executed. Indicates that is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow colors, and the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that the jackpot game is executed. It shows that the decision success effect that suggests is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17 is determined and the successful effect starts (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed, in which the strong vibration is vibrated for 4 seconds and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow emission (11 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the effect button LED for emitting the effect button 17 is determined and the success effect is started (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (a period longer than that when the effect button 17 vibrates strongly). Even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white" <"protruding button red" <"normal lever" <"protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow". Further, the jackpot expectation of each operation unit state is "normal" <"protruding".

The first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that when the determination success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success vibration) in which the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is vibrated by generating an effective period is generated. The point is that the production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the effective period is generated over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 vibrates over the longest period as the strong vibration effect generated during the fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the uplifting feeling of the player at the time of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, all three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (swaying operation), but the left and right effect symbols 70a are stopped and the central effect is produced. Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swaying operation). At this time, all three effect symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), or the left and right effect symbols 70a do not perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), and only the central effect symbol 70a fluctuates (effect operation). ) May be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the decorative portion fluctuate (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the tactile image SK and the design effect image ZE Only one of the above may be made to perform a fluctuating operation (directing operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the identification unit consisting of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The texture (pattern on the surface, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), or a light emitting effect may be added to the identification portion to perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a may be expanded or contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the effect symbol 70a is displaced in the direction of contraction (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expansion (smaller than the normal size) from the stop position. If it is large), it is better to make it a normal size and display it at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a does not swing and the decorative part and the number part protrude from the base image. It may be made to fluctuate like this. In this case, if the start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction protruding from the base image, it will be displayed in the base image and displayed at the stop position. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the number portion (identification character) in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), the decorative portion fluctuates when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the operation (effect operation) is not performed, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a symbol effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The fluctuation operation (directing operation) may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are not mentioned, but the frame lighting device during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the 10 may be set to the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (a light emitting mode in which the brightness is lower than that during the fluctuation, and a light emitting mode having less change or movement than during the fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the panel lighting device 76 has the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation). It may be set to (aspect, extinguishing). In this case, when the start command is received next time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 change (switch) to the light emitting mode according to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a in the loss mode is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), but the same number as the effect symbol 70a is used. The main stop may be made in such a loss mode. Further, when the production symbol 70a in the jackpot mode is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined jackpot mode (“333”), but the book is in the same number as the production symbol 70a. You may want to stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit issues start commands (special symbol hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. When the 130m is received, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ is still continued, but even if the variable display is started after the derivation display is instantaneously performed as in the effect symbol 70a. good. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position may be displayed at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start time command or the customer waiting state specification command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased without animation for one frame, but when the icon TI is stopped. It may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of a command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, it is erased by animation for 5 frames. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command is received while the number of hold icons larger than the number of special figure hold icons is displayed, the surplus hold icon HI is deleted by one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of the stop command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example. It may be erased by the animation for 5 frames.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality that is the same number, abnormality that has a deviation in the increasing direction) due to a command abnormality with the number of special figures held (understood), one is more than the specified number. After displaying a large number of hold icons, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed, but the predetermined number of hold icons are displayed as they are without displaying one more hold icon than the predetermined number. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, anomaly with a deviation in the increasing direction) due to a command abnormality with the number of special figures held (understood), this start command is received. Although the icon is displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the above, the icon may not be displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the reception of the start command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of the effect mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the effect mode and the type of the gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of the effect mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the effect mode and the type of the gaming state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the normal icon. May be good. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the special icon. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but the special icon or the specific icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) suggesting the change to the special icon is specified. A specific icon suggesting that the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon or the specific icon or the mode of the effect operation may be different from the form of the normal icon or the special icon or the mode of the effect operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the look-ahead specification command of the special figure hold number specification command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure hold number specification command is received. If the look-ahead specification command is not received normally, the hold icon is displayed, while if the look-ahead specification command is received normally without receiving the special figure hold number specification command normally, the hold icon is displayed. It may be avoided or vice versa. When the hold icon is displayed by receiving only one of the special figure hold number designation command and the look-ahead designation command, the icon change effect for this hold icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by the operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the effect control unit 130m does not accept the operation for changing the effect mode during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a based on the command abnormality that the command cannot be normally received, that is, the effect button 17 It is advisable to regulate the change of the effect mode based on the operation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon for prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 is displayed. Depending on the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon for which is enabled is displayed, an operation change effect that changes the button icon to one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. .. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined ratio. You may do so. In this case, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue advance notice effect or decision effect. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may be an effect button image having only an outline instead of being translucent, or it may be an effect button image having only a silhouette. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) when the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) or the development effect is executed. However, the frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4 to execute the motion effect of operating the frame movable member when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach advance notice effect or the development effect. Instead of the vibration effect, the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 at the time of executing the post-reach advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, final effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , The frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, or instead of the vibration effect. The motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the title indicating that the reach effect is being performed is not displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, but the display mode (white characters, white characters, which have different jackpot expectations). The title may be displayed by any of the red characters that have a higher expectation of big hits than the white characters, the rainbow characters that confirm the jackpot, etc.), and the title display changes to red characters or rainbow characters after being displayed in white characters. You may let it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is performed at the final stage of the SP reach effect, but it is set to be performed in the middle stage (first period) or the final stage (second period) of the SP reach effect, and the SP reach effect is performed. Even if the effect button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (the rate of being in a protruding state is higher) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle stage. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the effect button 17 is generated in the development effect, but an effective period for long-pressing the effect button 17 is generated as a jackpot notice effect other than the development effect. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that advances the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press is continued at a plurality of determination timings in the valid period, and to determine to what stage the effect is to be advanced based on the determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movement of the movable member (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and / or the effect symbol 70 that temporarily stops second is used to incite whether or not the reach is achieved. Was not supposed to be executed, but you may try to execute the reach fanning effect. In this case, when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the reach fanning effect can be executed, while the second variation effect (variation of the second special symbol) is executed. When the display) is executed, the reach fanning effect may not be executed or may be made more difficult to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) than the first variable effect, or the second variable effect may be executed in the specific gaming state. When (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the reach fanning effect can be executed, while when the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the reach fanning effect is executed. The effect may not be executed, or it may be difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low) as compared with the second variable effect.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, and executes a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Is common. In such a gaming machine, the interest of the game is enhanced by performing various effects in the variable effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, in a gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the variation effect and the interest of the game is poor.

◆ The first invention for solving the above problems is to satisfy the first starting condition (winning a game ball to the first starting port) in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) and the first determination means, and the second variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the effect control means executes the first variation effect and the second variation effect in any of a plurality of variation effect patterns, and the specific gaming state. The variation effect pattern to be executed is more when the second variation effect which is a loss result is executed during the specific gaming state than when the first variation effect which is a loss result is executed. There are many types of. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The second invention for solving the above problems is to satisfy the first starting condition (winning a game ball to the first starting port) in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) and the first determination means, and the second variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the effect control means executes the first variation effect and the second variation effect in any of a plurality of variation effect patterns, and the normal gaming state. The case where the first variation effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific gaming state is better than the case where the first variation effect that results in a loss is executed. The first variation effect is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The third invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, cross key 19) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided, and the effect control means varies according to the operation of the operation means. The effect element (effect mode, BGM, volume, amount of light, etc.) used for the effect can be changed to any of a plurality of effect elements, and the second variation is performed during the execution of the first variation effect in the specific gaming state. The effect element used for the effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The fourth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, cross key 19) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. Also, the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided, and the effect control means varies according to the operation of the operation means. The effect element (effect mode, BGM, volume, amount of light, etc.) used for the effect can be changed to any of a plurality of effect elements, and the first variation is performed during the execution of the second variation effect in the specific gaming state. The effect element used for the effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The fifth invention for solving the above problems is to satisfy the first starting condition (winning a game ball to the first starting port) in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined effect (pre-variation operation, look-ahead effect effect, etc.) in the variation effect. ) Is executed, and then the effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. The first variable effect is executed during the normal gaming state, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on the case where the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The sixth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined effect (pre-variation operation, look-ahead effect effect, etc.) in the variation effect. ) Is executed and then the effect symbol is variablely displayed. The first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state, and the second variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on the case where the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The seventh invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the effect symbol according to the judgment result of the first determination means. The effect is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the accompanying first variation effect and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means. The control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect, and also performs an operation effect (line notice effect) that performs a predetermined effect according to the operation of the operation means during the valid period. , Pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) It is more difficult to execute the operation effect when the first variation effect that results in a loss is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The eighth-1 invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second. A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game. Changes in the effect symbol according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect, and also performs an operation effect (line notice effect, pseudo continuous effect) that performs a predetermined effect according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period. , Development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.), and in the first variable effect, the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). The specific variation effect, which includes the variation effect (reach variation effect) and has a special result during the normal gaming state, is executed rather than the case where the specific variation effect, which is a special result, is executed. In the case, it is more difficult to execute the operation effect during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 8-2 for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect) that can be operated by the player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The lever 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the first 2 The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and an effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect, and also performs an operation effect (line notice effect, pseudo-ream) in which a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period. It is possible to execute an effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, etc.), and the specific game state is higher than the case where the first variable effect, which is a special result (big hit result), is executed during the normal game state. When the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed, the number of times the operation effect is executed tends to be smaller. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The ninth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. It is possible to generate an effective period and execute an operation effect (speech notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) in which a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the valid period. Therefore, the case where the second variation effect, which is a loss result, is executed during the specific gaming state is better than the case where the first variation effect, which is a loss result, is executed during the specific gaming state. The operation effect is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The tenth invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second. A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game. Changes in the effect symbol according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect, and performs an operation effect (line) in which a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period. It is possible to execute advance notice production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, cut-in production, decision production, etc., and in the first variable production, the second production (post-reach production) is performed after the first production (pre-reach production). ) Is executed, and in the second variation effect, the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). The second specific result, which includes the two specific variation effects (reach variation effect) and is a special result during the specific gaming state, rather than the case where the first specific variation effect, which is a special result during the specific gaming state, is executed. When the variable effect is executed, it is easier to execute the operation effect during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the tenth and second inventions for solving the above-mentioned problems are operating means (effect button 17, effect) that can be operated by the player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The lever 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the first 2 The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and an effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect, and performs a predetermined effect according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period (operation effect). It is possible to execute a dialogue advance notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, etc.) When the second variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the gaming state, the number of times the operation effect is executed is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The eleventh invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the effect symbol according to the judgment result of the first determination means. The effect is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the accompanying first variation effect and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means. The control means develops a vibration effect (during a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue advance notice effect, a step-up advance notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect during the effect, the cut-in effect, etc.), and the loss result during the specific game state is higher than the case where the first variable effect, which is the result of the loss during the normal game state, is executed. It is more difficult to execute the vibration effect when the first variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The invention of 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second. A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game. Changes in the effect symbol according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means vibrates the operating means during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect (during pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect). In the first variation effect, the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and the first specific variation effect (reach variation) is executed. When the first specific variation effect which is a special result is executed during the specific gaming state rather than when the first specific variation effect which is a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. It is more difficult for the vibration effect to be executed during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 12-2 for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect) that can be operated by the player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The lever 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the first 2 The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means vibrates the operating means during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect (during pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect). The first variation effect, which is a special result during the specific gaming state, is more than the case where the first variation effect, which is a special result during the normal gaming state, can be executed. Is more likely to be executed in a case where the number of times the vibration effect is executed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The thirteenth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the effect symbol according to the judgment result of the first determination means. The effect is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the accompanying first variation effect and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means. The control means develops a vibration effect (during a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue advance notice effect, a step-up advance notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect during the effect, the cut-in effect, etc.), and the loss result during the specific game state is higher than the case where the first variable effect, which is the result of the loss during the specific game state, is executed. It is easier to execute the vibration effect when the second variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 14-1 invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second. A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game. Changes in the effect symbol according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means vibrates the operating means during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect (during pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue advance notice effect, SU advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.). In the first variation effect, the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and the first specific variation effect (reach variation effect) is executed. ), The second variation effect includes a second specific variation effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). The case where the second specific variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state is better than the case where the first specific variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the gaming state. The vibration effect is easily executed during the effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 14-2 for solving the above-mentioned problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect) that can be operated by the player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The lever 24), the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the first 2 The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display and executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided. The effect control means vibrates the operating means during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect (during the look-ahead vibration effect, the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the time of the SU advance notice effect, and the time of the pseudo continuous effect). The second variation effect, which is a special result during the specific gaming state, is more than the case where the first variation effect, which is a special result during the specific gaming state, is executed. When it is executed, the number of times the vibration effect is executed is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The fifteenth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is satisfied (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variable effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is a special game effect (big hit game effect) during the execution of the special game. The first variation effect in the specific gaming state and the second variation effect in the specific gaming state are different modes (presence / absence of reach effect, presence / absence of the icon, type of background image, BGM). The special game effect after the first variation effect in the specific gaming state and the special game effect after the second variation effect in the specific gaming state are common. It is possible to perform the production in a mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The sixteenth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is in any one of a plurality of effect modes (effect modes A to G). It is controllable, and the change in the effect mode changes in the case where the first variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state than in the case where the first variation effect is executed during the normal gaming state. It is less likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The seventeenth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is in any one of a plurality of effect modes (effect modes A to G). The change in the effect mode is controllable, and the change in the effect mode is performed when the second variation effect is executed during the specific game state, as compared with the case where the first variation effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easy to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The eighteenth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. When the stop suggestion effect (eye catch effect, light emission effect effect, etc.) suggesting that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed can be executed, and the first variable effect which is a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. Rather, it is more difficult to execute the stop suggestion effect when the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The nineteenth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. When the stop suggestion effect (eye catch effect, light emission effect effect, etc.) suggesting that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed can be executed, and the first variable effect which is a special result is executed during the specific gaming state. Rather, it is easier to execute the stop suggestion effect when the second variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The invention of No. 20-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to a player, in which a first start condition is satisfied (a game ball to a first start port). Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the prize) and the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. ), And the first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means and the state control means (main control board 110), and the second variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means includes an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the above-mentioned effect control means, and the effect control means has a plurality of types of advance notice effects (indicating the expectation that the special game is executed during the execution of the first variation effect). It is possible to execute a dialogue advance notice effect, a step-up advance notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a development effect, a roulette advance notice effect, a cut-in effect, etc.), as compared with the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. When the first variation effect is executed during the normal gaming state, the number of types of the advance notice effect to be executed is larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 20-2 for solving the above-mentioned problems satisfies the first starting condition (game to the first starting port) in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the ball) and the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state) and the first determination means, and the second variation is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means includes an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the effect, and the effect control means has a plurality of types of advance notice effects suggesting an expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable effect. (Serence advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette advance notice effect, cut-in effect, etc.) can be executed, as compared with the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. In the case where the second variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state, the number of types of the advance notice effect to be executed is larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The invention of No. 21-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to a player, in which a first start condition is satisfied (a game ball to a first start port). Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the prize) and the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. ), And the first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means and the state control means (main control board 110), and the second variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the above-mentioned effect control means, and the effect control means indicates a advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable effect. It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, etc.), and the advance notice effect includes a first advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect) and a second advance notice effect (post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). When the first variation effect is executed during the normal gaming state, the number of times the first notice effect is executed is likely to be larger than when the first variation effect is executed during the state. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the invention of No. 21-2 for solving the above-mentioned problems satisfies the first starting condition (game to the first starting port) in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the ball) and the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The first variation effect is executed according to the determination result of the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state) and the first determination means, and the second variation is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the effect, and the effect control means suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable effect or the second variable effect. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.), and the advance notice effect includes the first advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect) and the second advance notice effect (post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). Therefore, when the second variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state, the execution of the first notice effect is more than when the first variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state. The number of times tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 22nd invention for solving the above problems is a movable member (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, 1st movable member 73, 1st movable member 73, 1st movable member 73, which can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 2 Movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state. According to the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is the first variation. It is possible to execute a specific effect (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) accompanied by the operation of the movable member during the execution of the effect, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. However, it is easier to execute the specific effect when the first variation effect is executed during the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirty-second invention for solving the above problems is a movable member (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first) that can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 2 Movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state. According to the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is the first variation. It is possible to execute a specific effect (pre-reading operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) accompanied by the operation of the movable member during the effect or the execution of the second variable effect, and the first variable effect during the specific gaming state. Is executed more easily when the second variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state than when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 24th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is to win a prize of a game medium in a first start area (first start port) in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. Whether to execute the special game based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game and the winning of the game medium to the second starting area (second starting port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the game is controlled, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The effect control means that executes the first variation effect according to the determination result of the control means (main control board 110) and the first determination means, and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means. (Effect control board 130), and the effect control means can output predetermined sounds (first to fourth generation notification sounds, etc.) from the sound output unit based on the winning of the game medium to the first start region. The predetermined sound is produced when the gaming medium wins the first starting region during the normal gaming state, as compared with when the gaming medium wins the first starting region during the specific gaming state. It is easy to output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 25th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is to win a prize of a game medium in a first start area (first start port) in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. Whether to execute the special game based on the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game and the winning of the game medium to the second starting area (second starting port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the game is controlled, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The effect control means that executes the first variation effect according to the determination result of the control means (main control board 110) and the first determination means, and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means. (Effect control board 130), and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined sound (first to fourth generation notification) from the sound output unit based on the winning of the game medium to the first start area or the second start area. Sound, etc.) can be output, and the case where the gaming medium wins the second starting area during the specific gaming state rather than the case where the gaming medium wins the first starting area during the specific gaming state. However, the predetermined sound is easily output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 26th invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variation of a plurality of effect symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect accompanied by the display and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of a plurality of effect symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means temporarily stops the plurality of effect symbols with a specific combination (chance eye, same color, roll including pseudo symbol, etc.) during the execution of the first variable effect (look-ahead chance eye). The effect (effect, pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and the case where the first variable effect is executed during the normal gaming state is better than the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. , The specific effect is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 27th invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second start port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variation of a plurality of effect symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect accompanied by the display and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of a plurality of effect symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. The effect control means temporarily stops the plurality of effect symbols at a specific combination (chance eye, same color, roll including pseudo symbol, etc.) during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. The specific effect (look-ahead chance eye effect, pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state rather than the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. When it is done, it is easier to execute the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 28th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is satisfied (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means corresponds to the effect symbol during the execution of the first variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (pre-reading effect effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) for displaying a predetermined image (effect image), and the normal game is more than the case where the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the specific effect when the first variation effect is executed during the state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 29th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is satisfied (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is during the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect. When a specific effect (pre-reading effect effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) that displays a predetermined image (effect image) corresponding to the effect symbol can be executed, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the specific effect when the second variation effect is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirtieth invention for solving the above problems is a movable member (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, which can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 2 Movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state. According to the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is the first variation. It is possible to execute the motion effect of the movable member (look-ahead motion effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect determination effect, etc.) during the execution of the effect, and the first variable effect that results in a loss during the normal gaming state is executed. It is more difficult to execute the motion effect when the first variation effect, which is a result of loss, is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The third invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a movable member (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. , The second movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). 110), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and a normal game. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state and the specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accordingly and executing the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided, and the effect control means is the first. 1 It is possible to execute the motion effect of the movable member (look-ahead motion effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) during the execution of the variable effect, and the first variable effect is the second effect after the first effect (pre-reach effect). The specific variation effect (reach variation effect) in which the effect (post-reach effect) is executed is included, and the specific variation effect that produces a special result during the normal gaming state is more special than the case where the specific variation effect is executed. In the case where the specific variation effect as a result is executed, it is more difficult to execute the operation effect during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the third invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a movable member (first movable member) capable of operating in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 73, the second movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). The board 110), the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and usually A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a game state and a specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect according to the above and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means. It is possible to execute the motion effect of the movable member (look-ahead motion effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, etc.) during the execution of the first variation effect, and the first variation effect which is a special result during the normal gaming state is executed. In the case where the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state, the number of times the operation effect is executed is likely to be smaller than in the case where the first variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirty-second invention for solving the above problems is a movable member (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first) that can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 2 Movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state. According to the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is the first variation. The movement effect of the movable member (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, decision effect, etc.) can be executed during the effect or the execution of the second variable effect, and the loss result is obtained during the specific gaming state. It is easier to execute the motion effect when the second variation effect, which results in a loss, is executed during the specific gaming state, than when the first variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The invention of No. 33-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is a movable member (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. , The second movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). 110), a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and a normal game. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state and the specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect accordingly and executing the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means is provided, and the effect control means is the first. During the execution of the first variation effect or the second variation effect, the operation effect of the movable member (look-ahead operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, determination effect, etc.) can be executed, and the first variation effect includes the first variation effect. The second variation effect includes the first specific variation effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and the second variation effect includes the first effect (pre-reach effect). ) Is included, and the first specific variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state, including the second specific variation effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed. Rather, it is easier to execute the operation effect during the first effect when the second specific variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The invention of 33-2 for solving the above-mentioned problems is a movable member (first movable member 73, 1st movable member 73, which can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (the winning of the game ball to the first start port) and the second movable member 74 and the like). ), The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state. According to the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the first variation effect and executing the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is the first. It is possible to execute the motion effect of the movable member (look-ahead motion effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, decision effect, etc.) during the execution of the variation effect or the second variation effect, and the special result is obtained during the specific gaming state. The number of times the motion effect is executed is more likely to increase when the second variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state than when the first variation effect is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 34th invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the effect symbol according to the judgment result of the first determination means. The effect is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the accompanying first variation effect and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means. The control means generates an effective period during the execution of the first variable effect, and also performs an operation effect (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development) in which a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the effective period. It is possible to execute an effect (effect, cut-in effect, fixed effect, etc.), and in the first variable effect, a specific variable effect in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). When the specific variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state including (reach variation effect), the operation effect is more likely to be executed during the second effect than during the first effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 35th invention for solving the above problems is an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port), and the second start condition. From the second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port), the normal game state, and the normal game state. The state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display of the effect symbol according to the judgment result of the first determination means. The effect is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the accompanying first variation effect and executes the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means. The control means is a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the first variable effect (during pre-reading vibration effect, during dialogue advance notice effect, during step-up advance notice effect, during pseudo-continuous effect, during development effect, cut-in effect). A specific variation effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect) is possible in the first variation effect. ), And when the specific variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the second effect than during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirty-sixth invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a movable member (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first movable member 73, first) that can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. 2 Movable member 74, etc.) and the first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port). The second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port), and the normal game state. According to the state control means (main control board 110) that controls the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determination means. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes the first variation effect and executes the second variation effect according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the effect control means is the first variation. It is possible to execute the motion effect of the movable member (look-ahead motion effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, decision effect, etc.) during the execution of the effect, and the first variable effect is performed from the first effect (pre-reach effect). Also includes a specific variation effect (reach variation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed later, and when the specific variation effect is executed during the specific gaming state, the first effect is higher than that during the first effect. 2 It is easier to execute the operation effect during the effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 37th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is satisfied (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means displays a plurality of options during the execution of the first variation effect. At the same time, it is possible to execute a selection effect (roulette effect) that selects an option according to the effect to be executed after that, as compared with the case where the first variable effect that results in a loss during the normal gaming state is executed. It is more difficult to execute the selection effect when the first variation effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 38th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is satisfied (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means displays a plurality of options during the execution of the first variation effect. At the same time, it is possible to execute a selection effect (roulette effect) for selecting an option according to the effect to be executed after that, as compared with the case where the first variable effect, which is a special result during the normal gaming state, is executed. It is more difficult to execute the selection effect when the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 39th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is displayed on the display means during the execution of the first variation effect. It is possible to execute an update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) that updates predetermined information (numerical value, quantity), and the first variable effect that results in a loss during the normal gaming state is executed. However, it is more difficult to execute the update effect when the first variation effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The 40th invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, in which the first start condition is satisfied (the game ball is awarded to the first start port). ), The first determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port). A second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The state control means (main control board 110) to be controlled and the first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means are executed, and the determination result of the second determination means is met. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means is displayed on the display means during the execution of the first variation effect. It is possible to execute an update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) that updates predetermined information (numerical value, quantity), and the first variable effect that is a special result during the normal gaming state is executed. However, it is more difficult to execute the update effect when the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, and when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol. Is to shift to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game, but it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the jackpot games.

In addition, if the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after the end of all jackpot games and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the normal game state is normally executed. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

Further, when the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game, the gaming machine may be used to shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the scope of claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General gate 45 1st start port 47 2nd start port 50 Grand prize opening 70 1st image display device 71 2nd image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can perform special games that are advantageous to the player
A first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and
A second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition, and
A state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The first variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is executed according to the determination result of the first determination means, and the second variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is executed according to the determination result of the second determination means. Equipped with production control means to
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute an update effect that updates predetermined information displayed on the display means during the execution of the first variation effect.
The update effect is more when the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the specific gaming state than when the first variation effect, which is a special result, is executed during the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by being difficult to execute.

Images